Top Banner
business solutions IBM and SAP IBM Sizing and Planning Questionnaire for SAP Solutions © Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 Send completed questionnaire and SAP sizing questions to either your local IBM contact or: Region IBM Contact by E-mail / Fax North and South America For more information about IBM SAP solutions go to http://www.ibm-sap.com For online entry of data from this questionnaire go to http://service.sap.com/sizing For access to the most recent version of this questionnaire go to http://www.ibm.com/erp/sizing IBM Americas Techline Solutions Sizing [email protected] / +1 845-491-2372 Europe, Middle East, and Africa IBMers raise a Techline Request through http://w3.ibm.com/support/emea/techline BPs raise a Techline Request through in case of attachment problems, send file to [email protected]
96
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: SAP Questionnaire 061510

business solutions

IBM and SAP

IBM Sizing and Planning Questionnairefor SAP Solutions

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008

Send completed questionnaire and SAP sizing questions to either your local IBM contact or:

Region IBM Contact by E-mail / Fax

North and South America IBM Americas Techline Solutions Sizing

Europe, Middle East, and Africa

For more information about IBM SAP solutions go to http://www.ibm-sap.comFor online entry of data from this questionnaire go to http://service.sap.com/sizingFor access to the most recent version of this questionnaire go to http://www.ibm.com/erp/sizing

[email protected] / +1 845-491-2372IBMers raise a Techline Request through http://w3.ibm.com/support/emea/techline

BPs raise a Techline Request through

http://www.ibm.com/partnerworld/techline

For both : in case of attachment problems, send file to

[email protected]

Page 2: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Asia, Pacific

[email protected](China)Hong KongTaiwanSouth KoreaJapanAustralia and New Zealand

[email protected]

The questionnaire was designed so that you can answer it without detailed knowledge of SAP solutions. IBM has established the Techlines Solutions Sizing team to provide assistance to your queries and help to size and configure your SAP solution . These have been established on geographical basis to address them locally. The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both: AIX, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, IBM, System x, System p, System I, System z. R/3, mySAP, SAP (Logo), SAP (Word), are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG. Informix is a trademark of Informix Corporation. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Oracle and Oracle 8 are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. Other company, product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

Instructions for Completing the Questionnaire

Before completing the questionnaire, read the introduction on this page. Then follow the steps below:

directly by the SAP QuickSizer. Other components in this questionnaire are estimated in this questionnaire tool by derivation fromwhite papers provided by SAP. Links to these white papers are provided within this questionnaire tool. You will need an OSS UserID and an SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.

will need an OSS User ID and an SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative. Request sizing fromIBM via SAP Quicksizer to IBM link or sending Quicksizer project name and customer number to your IBM Contact after setting Quicksizer project status to final.

IBM ASEAN/SA Techline(Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Indonesia, Vietnam, India and Sri Lanka)

[email protected]@[email protected]@[email protected]@au1.ibm.com

OthersIBM SAP International Competence Center, ISICC, Walldorf

1.      Complete the general sizing questions, providing special notes or comments about your SAP project.2.      Complete the sizing questions for the SAP components/applications selected. Some of these components are supported

3.    Return the questionnaire to IBM, or, enter the data directly into the SAP QuickSizer at web address: http://service.sap.com. You

Page 3: SAP Questionnaire 061510

What has to be Sized?SAP architectures have evolved from a client-server model to a Web-enabled front-end environment. The front-end device and network elements are shared across IT applications and a dedicated server infrastructure for SAP application and database server is required. The server infrastructure includes a hardware server plus operating system platform, a relational database and the application itself. To obtain satisfactory end-user response times for any application, the technical specification for the client device, network and the server infrastructure must be sized and specified.

The purpose of this questionnaire is to collect information that will be used to estimate the IBM hardware resources required to run the SAP application suite on IBM eServers including System z, System i, System p, System x or mixed environments. The sizing estimate results will include recommendations for CPU(s), memory, and disk for the server infrastructure. In addition, information from the sizing questionnaire may be used by an IBM sales representative or business partner to develop an IBM infrastructure proposal including additional hardware and software e.g. for systems management to support the SAP applications.

A sizing estimate is an approximation of the hardware resources required to support an SAP solution or component implementation. It is a pre-sales effort based on information available at a point in time, providing an entry into understanding the customer’s hardware requirements. Customers’ actual experiences will vary from the sizing estimate for many reasons, including batch and reporting workloads,

customer’s SAP implementation is an iterative process, which may be refined and repeated a number of times. We recommend checking the sizing input data and estimations during the implementation project. It is important to understand that the sizing estimate is a pre-installation effort mainly based on standard assumptions and benchmark performance data; it can not replace capacity planning for installed systems. The IBM/SAP sizing methodology is continually reviewed and revised to provide the best possible estimate of the IBM hardware resources required to run SAP. Guidelines for sizing SAP solutions come from a number of sources, including SAP, SAP benchmarks, and customer feedback. Based on this information and your completed sizing questionnaire, we will analyze your requirements and recommend an IBM hardware configuration.Sizing AssumptionsThis sizing will estimate the resources required to support your SAP activity with default values for CPU utilization, batch, spool, and reporting. The default values have been determined as a result of our experience with many SAP projects and sizings. This sizing estimation includes a workload from a provider other than IBM. IBM is not responsible for the accuracy of the data contained in such a workload. Any reliance by you on the third party workload is at your sole risk and will not create any liability or obligation for IBM. If you have any questions or are unsatisfied with the third party workload information, you should contact the third party provider.The system resources quoted to you in any sizing related communications are sufficient only for the workload(s) estimated. Other factors may require additional resources (e.g. additional non-estimated workloads, minimum configurations for RAID, allowance for growth, workspace, etc).The information provided to you in any sizing related communications are provided by International Business Machines Corporation (IBM) as a service to you and may be used for informational purposes only. Use of any sizing related communications is restricted to the

and custom code. The degree of variability can range from small to very significant. Sizing the hardware requirements for each

Page 4: SAP Questionnaire 061510

purpose of helping you predict a possible IBM eServer model processor, memory and disk resources for a given workload. All representations of processor utilization, throughput, response time, memory, disk, and other performance data in the sizing communications are estimates and averages based on certain assumptions and conditions. No representation is made that these throughputs and their corresponding response times or other performance data will be accurate or achieved in any given IBM eServer installation environment. They are based on specific configurations and run time environments. Customer results will vary. Any configuration recommended by the sizing information communicated should be tested and verified. By accepting this information or using the sizing details you agree to the terms and conditions contained herein. If you do not agree with such terms and conditions, please do not review or use the provided materials and return the materials to IBM.Customer results may vary, and IBM assumes no liability for actual results that differ from the sizing estimate.

Page 5: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 Contact InformationPlease fill in the information on the following contact points. If unknown or not applicable, leave blank.

QuickSizer customer number QuickSizer project name

Company Name SAP ContactStreet Address Phone Number

City, State/Province e-mail addressZip/Postal Code, Country

Customer Contact Business Partner or SAP Value Added ResellerTitle Contact

Phone Number Phone Numbere-mail address e-mail address

IBM ContactPhone Numbere-mail address

Opportunity Number-REQUIRED

A7
We highly recommend that you consider putting your answers in this questionnaire directly into the SAP QuickSizer. The QuickSizer may be found at http://service.sap.com/quicksizing. This site requires an SAP supplied username and password. You may use username s0001066187 and password a813i817 on a temporary basis. The QuickSizer also requires a customer number. You may use 12345 on a temporary basis. The project name is your choice. Please consider using something you remember with some sort of time or date reference in the name.
Page 6: SAP Questionnaire 061510
Page 7: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 General Sizing Questions for Initial Sizings – New Installation or new workloads

optional.This section is intended for new SAP implementations. If you already have installed SAP components and you want to expand your installation by adding new modules or additional users or new components or solutions, you should select ‘Upgrade Sizing’ when generating this questionnaire.

Industry SolutionPlease specify if you plan to implement a specific industry solution or want to give any other additional information:

Planned Hardware Platform

you want to consider more than one application server option, please describe each scenario in the comments section below. Smaller system requirements can be configuration in which one server provides both the database and application server functions. Some application platform components do have restricted sizing proposal will take your preferences into account wherever possible.

Application Server(s)

System z System z System p System xSystem p System p System xSystem x System xSystem i System i System x

Comments:

Preferred Disk Technology SizingDisk Technology Questions Answer OptionsPlease indicate your preferred disk technology? Default DS4300

In this section, we would like to know about your hardware and software requirements. Some of the subsections require responses; others are

Which IBM eServer would you like to consider for this sizing estimate? Specify a database server and one of its application server options. If

Database Server

A34
Enter the type of disk technology you plan to use. This could be DS4300, ESS, SCSI or some other type of disk technology.
Page 8: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Storage SizingStorage Capacity Questions Answer OptionsWhat RAID Technology will you use? Default-RAID5At what capacity do you run your storage subsystem? Default-80%What storage growth factor per year over how many years would you like us to use? Default-0%, 0 yearsWhat storage compression factor would you like us to use? Default-0%Will you be backing up data directly to tape? Full backup to disk? Incremental backup to disk? Default-to tape

Scalability SizingScalability Questions Answer OptionsHow important is scalability in your hardware configuration? Default-not important

High Availability SizingIBM servers offer a wide range of features to address high availability. Some features come as standard, others are optional. In order for us to better determine which high availability options should be included in the recommended configuration, please indicate your preferences for high availability.

High Availability Questions Answer OptionsIs high availability technology, such as clustering or HACMP, on the database server required? Default-noIf yes, where will failover be? App Server? Test Server? Idle Server? Other? Default-App

Backup/Restore SizingBackup/Restore Question Answer OptionsDo you want a backup device included in the proposed configuration? Default-no

UNICODE SizingUNICODE is an international character set standard which allows you to process and store virtually all the languages and scripts in the world.UNICODE Question Answer OptionsWill you be using UNICODE? Default-yes

Length of your business year SizingLength of your business year Question Answer OptionsHow many working days are in your business year? Default-250

A38
Enter the type of disk technology you plan to use. This could be RAID5 which is the default, RAID1 or any other RAID technology.
A39
Disks are not normally filled to 100% capacity because of fragmentation, free space, reserved space, etc. Enter the estimate of the percentage of the total storage capacity that will be normally filled.
A40
Enter the estimate of the percentage of annual growth you expect for storage capacity and over how many years you would like us to calculate this growth.
A41
There are various methods for compressing data to use storage capacity more efficiently. Enter the percentage of total storage that you expect to gain by using a compression solution. This defaults to 0% except for System z which defaults to 40% compression because of hardare data compression.
A42
We can provide an estimate for Tivoli Storage Manager buffer pools. If you plan to backup directly to tape, we add no additional disk storage for buffer pools. If you plan a full backup to disk, we assume 100% additional storage for buffer pools. If you plan to do incremental backups to disk, you can specify the percentage of total production disk that we should allocate for disk buffer pools. A reasonable percentage might be 10-15%.
L68
Enter the length of your business year in days. Defaults are 250 days for US and Latin America, 300 for Asia/Pacific and 200 for EMEA.
Page 9: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Project Phases and GrowthBy default, this sizing estimate will estimate the resources required to support the SAP activity you describe in the solution sections of this questionnaire. If desired, you can use this section to request sizing estimates for specific project phases. A project phase may be the implementation of one or more SAP business applications, growth in terms of additional users, or growth in business volumes.If you plan to implement in different phases, please copy the respective tabs of the questionnaire and submit together.

Type of SizingType of Sizing Questionnaire Answer Options

Page 10: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR ERP

What release of ERP are you implementing 6.0What time does the AVERAGE workday start 9:00What time does the AVERAGE workday end 18:00What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Enter total CONCURRENT users during the PEAK hour--A user must NOT be counted twiceHe is either one type of concurrently active user or another--NOT both at the same time during the PEAK hourUSER BASED SIZING

LOW MEDIUM HIGHTypically, high users are fewer than 20% of the total for any module. If in doubt put the concurrently active users in the medium category.CO-Users in Controlling-PEAK PER HOURFI-Users in Financial Transactions-PEAK PER HOURPA-Users in Personnel Administration-PEAK PER HOURPD-Users in Personnel Development-PEAK PER HOURLE-Users in Logistics Execution-PEAK PER HOURALM/PM-Users in Asset Lifecycle Management-PEAK PER HOUR

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing ERP 6.0
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B7
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B8
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B22
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D22
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F22
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B23
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D23
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F23
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B34
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour. These users cause only a slight amount of workload so putting users in this category affects the sizing only slightly.
C34
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour. If you're not sure, you might put all of your users in the medium category.
D34
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour. Typically, high users are less than 20% of your total user count for any application.
Page 11: SAP Questionnaire 061510

MM-Users in Materials Management-PEAK PER HOURPP-Users in Production Planning-PEAK PER HOURPS-Users in Project Management-PEAK PER HOURQM-Users in Quality Management-PEAK PER HOURCS-Users in Customer Service-PEAK PER HOURSD-Users in Sales & Distribution-PEAK PER HOURBC-Users in Basis transactions-PEAK PER HOURTOTAL CONCURRENT PEAK users -PEAK PER HOUR 0 0 0 0 usersApproximate SAPS 0 SAPS 0 init SAPSApproximate Storage Qser GB'sIf AFS is implemented add this uplift 0 SAPS Click for sizing white paper

0OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIME

CO-PA-BIL-AVERAGE Billing docs posted to CO per YEAR 0 0 NA NACO-PA-BIL-PEAK Billing docs posted to CO per PEAK TIME 0 NA 12:00 13:00CO-PA-FI-AVERAGE Financial docs posted to CO per YEAR 0 0 NA NACO-PA-FI-PEAK Financial docs posted to CO per PEAK TIME 0 NA 12:00 12:00CO-PA-SLS-AVERAGE Sales orders posted to CO per YEAR 0 0 NA NACO-PA-SLS-PEAK Sales orders posted to CO per PEAK TIME 0 NA 12:00 12:00CO-AVERAGE Controlling docs or postings per YEAR 0 0 NA NACO-PEAK Controlling docs or postings per PEAK TIME 0 NA 12:00 12:00EC-PCA-AVERAGE Profit center charged off docs per YEAR 0 0 NA NA EC-PCA-PEAK Profit center charged off docs per PEAK TIME 0 NA 12:00 12:00FIN-BAC-AVERAGE Business Accounting docs per YEAR 0 0 NA NA FIN-BAC-PEAK Business Accounting docs per PEAK TIME 0 NA 12:00 12:00

OBJECTS ST TIME END TIMECO-OM-PEAK Sender-receiver relations for all cycles NA NA NA NA 0 0CO-OM-RAT-PEAK Orders/period with overhead rate NA NA NA NA 0 0CO-OM-SET-PEAK Orders allocated/period NA NA NA NA 0 0

Contract Accounting--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.OBJECTS ITEMS EDRs/bd ST TIME END TIME

EDR-BILL-PEAK Event Detail Record 0 0 NA NA 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS ST TIME END TIMELOAD-BILL-PEAK Load Billing 0 NA NA NA 0 0LOAD-INV-PEAK Load Invoicing 0 NA NA NA 0 0CONV-INV-PEAK Convergent Invoicing 0 NA NA NA 0 0DUNNING-PEAK Dunning 0 NA NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR FINANCIALS--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

E50
These are the estimated SAPS if you are adding workload to an existing SAP ERP system.
G50
These are the estimated SAPS if this is a completely new installation. SAP recommends a minimum of 2000 SAPS for the initial install.
A52
Apparel and Footwear Solution is an add-on to core ERP. The uplift is 25% for MM, 30% for SD and 50% for PP. This has been included in this uplift. If categories are in use add 5% more. If split valuation is in use add 5% more.
G52
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
B56
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C56
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D56
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E56
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F56
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B57
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. This must be larger than the annual objects divided by the number of working days divided by the length of the average work day.
C57
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D57
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E57
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G57
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H57
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B58
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C58
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D58
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E58
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F58
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B59
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. This must be larger than the annual objects divided by the number of working days divided by the length of the average work day.
C59
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D59
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E59
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G59
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H59
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B60
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C60
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D60
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E60
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F60
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B61
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. This must be larger than the annual objects divided by the number of working days divided by the length of the average work day.
C61
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D61
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E61
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
H61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B62
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C62
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D62
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E62
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F62
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B63
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. This must be larger than the annual objects divided by the number of working days divided by the length of the average work day.
C63
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D63
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E63
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G63
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
H63
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B64
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C64
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D64
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E64
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F64
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B65
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. This must be larger than the annual objects divided by the number of working days divided by the length of the average work day.
C65
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D65
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E65
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G65
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
H65
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B66
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C66
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D66
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E66
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F66
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B67
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. This must be larger than the annual objects divided by the number of working days divided by the length of the average work day.
C67
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D67
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E67
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G67
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
H67
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B70
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G70
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H70
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B71
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G71
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H71
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B72
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G72
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H72
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B76
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS, EDRs/bd and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C76
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
D76
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
G76
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H76
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B79
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C79
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
G79
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H79
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B80
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C80
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
G80
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H80
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B81
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C81
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
G81
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H81
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B82
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C82
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
G82
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H82
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 12: SAP Questionnaire 061510

OBJECTS ST TIME END TIMEEDR-UPL-PEAK EDR Upload NA NA NA NA 0 0PAY-RUN-PEAK Payment Run NA NA NA NA 0 0CD-PL-PEAK Payment Lots NA NA NA NA 0 0CORR-PRINT-PEAK Correspondence Print NA NA NA NA 0 0DEF-POST-PEAK Deferred Postings NA NA NA NA 0 0

EDRs AddFld MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEEDR-UPL-AVERAGE Event Detail Record Upload NA NA 0 NA NA

OBJECTS MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEPAY-RUN-AVERAGE Payment Run NA NA NA 0 NA NACD-PL-AVERAGE Payment Lots NA NA NA 0 NA NACORR-PRINT-AVERAGE Correspondent Print NA NA NA 0 NA NADEF-POST-AVERAGE Deferred Postings NA NA NA 0 NA NA

OBJECTS ITEMS MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEEDR-BILL-AVERAGE Event Detail Record Billing 0 NA NA 0 NA NALOAD-BILL-AVERAGE Load Billing 0 NA NA 0 NA NACONV-INV-AVERAGE Convergent Invoicing 0 NA NA 0 NA NADUNNING-AVERAGE Dunning 0 NA NA 0 NA NA

Postings BP itm GL itm Payments P itm % credit MONTHS ST TIME END TIMESUBLEDGER-AVERAGE Subledger Documents 0 0 0 0 0 NA NA

ESS/MSS workload Scenarios Steps ST TIME END TIMEESS-LEAVE 7 NA NA NA 0 0ESS-CATS 9 NA NA NA 0 0ESS-TRAVEL 18 NA NA NA 0 0MSS_COST 9 NA NA NA 0 0MSS-PERS 13 NA NA NA 0 0

OBJECTS MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEHCM-PT-AVERAGE Processed Time Pairs per YEAR NA NA NA 0 NA NAHCM-PT-PEAK Processed Time Pairs per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0HCM-PY-AVERAGE Payroll periods incl retro calculations NA NA NA 0 NA NAHCM-PY-PEAK Payroll periods incl retro calculations NA NA NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR HUMAN CAPITAL MANAGEMENT--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

THRUPUT SIZING FOR E-Recruitment--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

B85
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G85
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H85
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B86
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G86
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H86
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B87
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G87
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H87
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B88
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G88
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H88
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B89
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G89
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H89
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B92
If you enter the number of EDR's, you MUST enter Addfld and MONTHS. These are the average number of EDR's uploaded during the year. You specify the time period that these peak EDR's are uploaded using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
C92
Enter the length of the additional fields in the EDR table.
F92
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B95
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter MONTHS. These are the average number of OBJECTS processed during the year. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are storage on disk before being deleted or archived in the MONTHS column. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
F95
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B96
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter MONTHS. These are the average number of OBJECTS processed during the year. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are storage on disk before being deleted or archived in the MONTHS column. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
F96
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B97
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter MONTHS. These are the average number of OBJECTS processed during the year. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are storage on disk before being deleted or archived in the MONTHS column. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
F97
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B98
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter MONTHS. These are the average number of OBJECTS processed during the year. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are storage on disk before being deleted or archived in the MONTHS column. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
F98
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B101
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and Months. These are the average number of OBJECTS processed during the year. You specify the time period that these OBJECTS remain in online storage before being either deleted or archived in the MONTHS field. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
C101
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
F101
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B102
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and Months. These are the average number of OBJECTS processed during the year. You specify the time period that these OBJECTS remain in online storage before being either deleted or archived in the MONTHS field. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
C102
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
F102
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B103
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and Months. These are the average number of OBJECTS processed during the year. You specify the time period that these OBJECTS remain in online storage before being either deleted or archived in the MONTHS field. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
C103
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
F103
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B104
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and Months. These are the average number of OBJECTS processed during the year. You specify the time period that these OBJECTS remain in online storage before being either deleted or archived in the MONTHS field. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
C104
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
F104
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B107
If you enter the number of Postings, you MUST enter BP itm, GL itm, Payments, P itm, % credit and MONTHS. These are the average number of Postings processed during the year. You specify the time period that these Postings are stored on disk before being deleted or archived in the MONTHS column. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
C107
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
D107
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
E107
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
F107
Enter the number of business partner line items per posting. Not the total line items.
G107
Enter the percentage of prepaid payments with credit card.
H107
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A110
This allows you to estimate the workload from employees and managers accessing information and performing routine tasks.
B110
A scenario is a user session where the employee or manager accomplishes a specific task. This may entail a single dialog or usually multiple dialogs.
A111
Employee leave requests
B111
If you enter the number of Scenarios, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of LEAVE scenarios processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak Scenarios are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C111
Enter the number of steps required for each scenario including navigation to the scenario entry. The defaults for each scenario are based on measurements of each specific scenario type and may be over-ridden.
G111
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H111
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A112
Cross-Application Time Sheets or recording working time.
B112
If you enter the number of Scenarios, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of CATS scenarios processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak Scenarios are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C112
Enter the number of steps required for each scenario including navigation to the scenario entry. The defaults for each scenario are based on measurements of each specific scenario type and may be over-ridden.
G112
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H112
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A113
Travel expense recording
B113
If you enter the number of Scenarios, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of TRAVEL scenarios processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak Scenarios are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C113
Enter the number of steps required for each scenario including navigation to the scenario entry. The defaults for each scenario are based on measurements of each specific scenario type and may be over-ridden.
G113
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H113
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A114
Cost center monitoring
B114
If you enter the number of Scenarios, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of COST center monitoring scenarios processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak Scenarios are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C114
Enter the number of steps required for each scenario including navigation to the scenario entry. The defaults for each scenario are based on measurements of each specific scenario type and may be over-ridden.
G114
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H114
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A115
Personnel change requests
B115
If you enter the number of Scenarios, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of Personnel change request scenarios processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak Scenarios are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C115
Enter the number of steps required for each scenario including navigation to the scenario entry. The defaults for each scenario are based on measurements of each specific scenario type and may be over-ridden.
G115
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H115
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Scenarios will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B118
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter MONTHS. These are the average number of clock-in/clock-out time pairs(OBJECTS) processed during the year. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are stored on disk before being deleted or archived in the MONTHS column. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
F118
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B119
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of clock-in/clock-out time pairs(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually a day or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G119
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H119
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B120
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter MONTHS. These are the average number of retro calculations(OBJECTS) processed during the year. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are stored on disk before being deleted or archived in the MONTHS column. This is used to calculate Disk requirements.
F120
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B121
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. A retro calculation calculates payroll from a previous payroll run to correct a change. Enter the (number of retro calculations PER EMPLOYEE PER PAYROLL Plus 1) times (the number of employees). You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G121
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H121
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 13: SAP Questionnaire 061510

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP DCS Attach Size MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEERC-CA-REG-AVERAGE Candidate Registrations per YEAR 0 no 0 NA NAERC-CA-REG-PEAK Candidate Registrations per PEAK TIME 0 no NA NA NA 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP DCS ST TIME END TIMEERC-APPL-PEAK Candidate Applications per PEAK TIME 0 no 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP ST TIME END TIMEERC-REQ-PEAK Requisition creation per PEAK TIME 0 0 0

OBJECTS % CHG % DISP DCS ST TIME END TIMEERC-JOB-SE-PEAK Candidate Applications per PEAK TIME NA no 0 0

OBJECTS % CHG % DISP ST TIME END TIMEERC-CA-LST-PEAK Requisition creation per PEAK TIME NA 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMELE-WM-AVERAGE Transfer Orders per YEAR 0 0 NA NALE-WM-PEAK Transfer Orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0LE-SHP-AVERAGE Delivery notes and goods issue per YEAR 0 0 NA NALE-SHP-PEAK Delivery notes and goods issue per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEALM-PM-AVERAGE Maintenance Orders per YEAR 0 0 NA NAALM-PM-PEAK Maintenance Orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0MM-IM-AVERAGE Material Movements per YEAR 0 0 NA NAMM-IM-PEAK Material Movements per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0MM-PUR-AVERAGE Purchase Orders per YEAR 0 0 NA NAMM-PUR-PEAK Purchase Orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0PP-CONF-AVERAGE Order Confirmations per YEAR 0 0 NA NAPP-CONF-PEAK Order Confirmations per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0PP-REM-AVERAGE Planned Orders per YEAR 0 0 NA NAPP-REM-PEAK Planned Orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0PP-SFC-AVERAGE Production Orders per YEAR 0 0 NA NAPP-SFC-PEAK Production Orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0QM-IM-AVERAGE Inspections in Quality Mgmt per YEAR 0 0 NA NAQM-IM-PEAK Inspections in Quality Mgmt per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

OBJECTS WBS NETW Act/Net % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIME

THRUPUT SIZING FOR LOGISTICS EXECUTION--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

THRUPUT SIZING FOR PRODUCT DEV AND EXECUTION--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

B125
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C125
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D125
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E125
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F125
Distributed Candidate Scenario. Will you separate the user interaction function from the database access function?
G125
Enter the number of attachments per object.
H125
Enter the average size of one attachment in KB.
I125
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B126
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C126
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D126
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E126
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F126
Distributed Candidate Scenario. Will you separate the user interaction function from the database access function?
J126
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
K126
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B129
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C129
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D129
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E129
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F129
Distributed Candidate Scenario. Will you separate the user interaction function from the database access function?
G129
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H129
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B132
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C132
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D132
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E132
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F132
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
G132
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B135
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D135
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E135
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F135
Distributed Candidate Scenario. Will you separate the user interaction function from the database access function?
G135
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H135
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B138
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D138
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E138
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F138
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
G138
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B142
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C142
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D142
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E142
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F142
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B143
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C143
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D143
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E143
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G143
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H143
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B144
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C144
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D144
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E144
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F144
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B145
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C145
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D145
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E145
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G145
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H145
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B149
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C149
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D149
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E149
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F149
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B150
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C150
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D150
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E150
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G150
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H150
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B151
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C151
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D151
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E151
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F151
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B152
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C152
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D152
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E152
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G152
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H152
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B153
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C153
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D153
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E153
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F153
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B154
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C154
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D154
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E154
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G154
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H154
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B155
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C155
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D155
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E155
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F155
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B156
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C156
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D156
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E156
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G156
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H156
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B157
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C157
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D157
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E157
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F157
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B158
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C158
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D158
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E158
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G158
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H158
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B159
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C159
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D159
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E159
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F159
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B160
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C160
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D160
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E160
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G160
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H160
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B161
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C161
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D161
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E161
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F161
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B162
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C162
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D162
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E162
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G162
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H162
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 14: SAP Questionnaire 061510

PS-AVERAGE Projects per YEAR 0 0 NA NAPS-PEAK Projects per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

PLAN OR COMP REORD Non-REORHORIZON % CHG % DISP % LTS ST TIME END TIMEMRP RUN 0 0 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMECS-AG-AVERAGE Customer Service objects per YEAR 0 0 NA NACS-AG-PEAK Customer Service objects per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0SD-CUST-AVERAGE Customer Contacts per YEAR 0 0 NA NASD-CUST-PEAK Customer Contacts per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0SD-BIL-AVERAGE Billing Documents per YEAR 0 0 NA NASD-BIL-PEAK Billing Documents per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0SD-POS-AVERAGE Point of Sales objects for Retail per YEAR 0 0 NA NASD-POS-PEAK Point of Sales objects for Retail per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0SD-SLS-AVERAGE Sales Orders per YEAR 0 0 NA NASD-SLS-PEAK Sales Orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

COM CAS REMC MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEICM-CASE-AVERAGE Customer Service cases per YEAR 0 NA NA 0 NA NAICM-CASE-PEAK Customer Service cases per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0

DOCU REMD MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEICM-DOC-AVERAGE Commission documents posted per YEAR 0 NA NA 0 NA NAICM-DOC-PEAK Commission documents posted per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0

ITEMS COM CON ST TIME END TIMEICM-SET-AVERAGE Settlement items per YEAR 0 NA NA NA NA NAICM-SET-PEAK Settlement items PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMETV-RECEIPT-AVERAGE Travel Receipts per YEAR 0 0 NA NATV-RECEIPT-PEAK Travel Receipts per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

OBJECTS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEBC-PRINT-AVERAGE Print Pages per YEAR NA 0 NA NABC-PRINT-PEAK Print Pages per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR SALES AND SERVICE--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

THRUPUT SIZING FOR CORPORATE SERVICES--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

THRUPUT SIZING FOR APPLICATION SERVER SERVICES--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

B165
If you enter the number of Projects(OBJECTS), you MUST enter WBS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of Projects(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C165
Enter the average number of work breakdown structure elements per project. Not the total WBS elements.
D165
Average # of network plans per project
E165
Enter the average number of activities per network.
F165
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
G165
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
H165
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B166
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter WBS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of Projects(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C166
Enter the average number of work breakdown structure elements per project. Not the total WBS elements.
D166
Average # of network plans per project
E166
Enter the average number of activities per network.
F166
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
G166
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
I166
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
J166
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
C169
Enter number of line items PER order. NOT total line items.
D169
Enter the purchase requisitions for reorder- point driven materials
E169
Enter the purchase requisitions or schedule line items for non-reorder-point driven materials
F169
Enter number of line items PER order. NOT total line items.
G169
Enter the % of BOM strcture changes per day
H169
Enter the percentage of BOM components with object dependencies (average).
I169
Enter the percentage of orders with Lead Time Scheduling
J169
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
K169
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B173
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C173
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D173
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E173
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F173
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B174
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C174
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D174
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E174
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G174
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H174
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B175
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C175
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D175
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E175
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F175
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B176
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C176
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D176
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E176
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G176
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H176
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B177
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C177
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D177
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E177
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F177
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B178
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C178
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D178
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E178
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G178
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H178
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B179
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C179
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D179
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E179
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F179
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B180
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C180
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D180
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E180
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G180
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H180
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B181
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C181
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D181
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E181
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F181
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B182
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of OBJECTS processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C182
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D182
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E182
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G182
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H182
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B185
If you enter the number of COM CAS you MUST enter REMC and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of COM CAS per year multiplied by the number of processing steps. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C185
Enter the number of remunerations a document creates. In general this is the number of (direct and indirect) recipients per commission case.
F185
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B186
If you enter the number of COM CAS, you MUST enter REMC and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of COM CAS processed during the peak or highest time period usually an hour or a couple of hours multiplied by the number of processing steps. You specify the time period that these peak COM CAS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C186
Enter the number of remunerations a document creates. In general this is the number of (direct and indirect) recipients per commission case.
G186
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H186
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B189
If you enter the number of DOCU, you MUST enter REMD and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of documents(DOCU) that are directly imported from the operational system(s) to ICM without using the commission case process per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C189
Enter the number of remunerations a document creates. In general this is the number of (direct and indirect) recipients per commission case.
F189
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B190
If you enter the number of DOCU, you MUST enter REMD and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of documents(DOCU) directly imported from the operational systems(s) to ICM without using the commission case process that are processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak DOCU are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C190
Enter the number of remunerations a document creates. In general this is the number of (direct and indirect) recipients per commission case.
G190
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H190
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B193
If you enter the number of ITEMS, you MUST enter COM CON but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. This is the total of COM CAS and DOCU per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C193
Enter the number of remunerations a document creates. In general this is the number of (direct and indirect) recipients per commission case.
B194
If you enter the number of ITEMS, you MUST enter COM CON and ST TIME and END TIME. This is the total of COM CAS and DOCU processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak ITEMS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C194
Enter the number of remunerations a document creates. In general this is the number of (direct and indirect) recipients per commission case.
G194
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H194
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B198
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of OBJECTS per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C198
Enter the number of remunerations a document creates. In general this is the number of (direct and indirect) recipients per commission case.
D198
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E198
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F198
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B199
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of objects processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C199
Enter the number of remunerations a document creates. In general this is the number of (direct and indirect) recipients per commission case.
D199
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E199
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G199
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H199
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B203
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of print pages(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
D203
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E203
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F203
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B204
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of print pages(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D204
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E204
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
G204
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H204
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 15: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR CRM

What release of CRM are you implementing 2007What time does the AVERAGE workday start 9:00What time does the AVERAGE workday end 18:00What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Enter total CONCURRENT users during the peak hour--A user must NOT be counted twiceHe is either one type of user or another--NOT both at the same time during the PEAK hour

USER-BASED SIZING FOR CRM MASTER DATALOW MEDIUM HIGH ext SAPS GB-Storage

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing CRM 2007
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B7
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B8
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B22
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D22
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F22
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B23
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D23
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F23
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B35
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour
C35
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour
D35
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour.
Page 16: SAP Questionnaire 061510

ACC-USER-CRM Account Management-PEAK PER HOUR 0 Use Qser

New Acct Chg Acct Dis Acct Tot Acct ST TIME END TIMECRM-CORACC-AVERAGE Corp Accounts per YEAR NA 0 NA NACRM-CORACC-PEAK Corp Accounts per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0CRM-INDACC-AVERAGE Individual Accounts per YEAR NA 0 NA NACRM-INDACC-PEAK Individual Accounts per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0

USER-BASED SIZING FOR CRM SALESLOW MEDIUM HIGH ext SAPS GB-Storage

Users doing CRM Activity Management-PEAK PER HOUR 0 0Users doing CRM Opportunity Management-PEAK PER HOUR 0 0Users doing CRM Sales Transactions-PEAK PER HOUR 0 0TOTAL CRM Sales-PEAK PER HOUR 0 0 0 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMECRM-SLSQC-AVERAGE sales quotations per YEAR 0 0 NA NACRM-SLSQC-PEAK sales quotations per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0CRM-SLS-AVERAGE sales orders per YEAR 0 0 NA NACRM-SLS-PEAK sales orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0CRM-SLSCO-AVERAGE sales contracts per YEAR 0 0 NA NACRM-SLSCO-PEAK sales contracts per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

OBJECTS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMECRM-LEAD-AVERAGE sales leads per YEAR NA 0 NA NACRM-LEAD-PEAK sales leads per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0CRM-ACT-AVERAGE sales activities per YEAR NA 0 NA NACRM-ACT-PEAK sales activities per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0CRM-APP-AVERAGE sales appointments per YEAR NA 0 NA NACRM-APP-PEAK sales appointments per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0CRM-OPP-AVERAGE sales opportunities per YEAR NA 0 NA NACRM-OPP-PEAK sales opportunities per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR CRM Acc for BP's--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

THRUPUT SIZING FOR CRM SALES--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

E36
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
B40
These are the total number of new created accounts (individual or corporate) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
D40
These are the total number of changed accounts (individual or corporate) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
E40
These are the total number of displayed accounts (individual or corporate) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
F40
These are the total number of accounts accounts (individual or corporate) managed in the CRM system per year. This is used to calculate Disk.
B41
These are the total number of new created accounts (individual or corporate) per PEAK time period. This is used to calculate CPU.
D41
These are the total number of changed accounts (individual or corporate) per PEAK time period. This is used to calculate CPU.
E41
These are the total number of displayed accounts (individual or corporate) per PEAK time period. This is used to calculate CPU.
G41
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H41
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B42
These are the total number of new created accounts (individual or corporate) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
D42
These are the total number of changed accounts (individual or corporate) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
E42
These are the total number of changed accounts (individual or corporate) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
F42
These are the total number of accounts accounts (individual or corporate) managed in the CRM system per year. This is used to calculate Disk.
B43
These are the total number of new created accounts (individual or corporate) per PEAK time period. This is used to calculate CPU.
D43
These are the total number of changed accounts (individual or corporate) per PEAK time period. This is used to calculate CPU.
E43
These are the total number of displayed accounts (individual or corporate) per PEAK time period. This is used to calculate CPU.
G43
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H43
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B46
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour
C46
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour
D46
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour.
E46
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
A49
Enter customer orders that are entered thru CRM. This may be thru the call center or thru Internet self service or other ways.
B54
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of sales quotations(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C54
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D54
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E54
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F54
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B55
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of sales quotations(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C55
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D55
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E55
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G55
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H55
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B56
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of sales orders(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C56
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D56
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E56
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F56
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B57
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of sales orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C57
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D57
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E57
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G57
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H57
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B58
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of sales contracts(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C58
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D58
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E58
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F58
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B59
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of sales contracts(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C59
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D59
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E59
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G59
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H59
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B62
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of sales leads(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
D62
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E62
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F62
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B63
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of sales leads(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D63
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E63
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G63
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H63
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B64
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of sales activities(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
D64
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E64
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F64
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B65
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of sales activities(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D65
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E65
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G65
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H65
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B66
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of sales appointments(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
D66
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E66
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F66
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B67
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of sales appointments(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D67
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E67
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G67
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H67
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B68
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of sales opportunities(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
D68
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E68
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F68
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B69
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of sales opportunities(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D69
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E69
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G69
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H69
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 17: SAP Questionnaire 061510

USER-BASED SIZING FOR CRM SERVICELOW MEDIUM HIGH ext SAPS GB-Storage

Users doing CRM Service Transactions-PEAK PER HOUR 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMECRM-SRVQC-AVERAGE service order quotes per YEAR 0 0 NA NACRM-SRVQC-PEAK service order quotes per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0CRM-SRV-AVERAGE service orders per YEAR 0 0 NA NACRM-SRV-PEAK service orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0CRM-SRVCC-AVERAGE service contracts/quotes per YEAR 0 0 NA NACRM-SRVCC-PEAK service contracts/quotes per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0CRM-CPLT-AVERAGE compliants/returns/repairs per YEAR 0 0 NA NACRM-CPLT-PEAK complaints/returns/repairs per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0CRM-WCL-AVERAGE warranty claims per YEAR 0 0 NA NACRM-WCL-PEAK warranty claims per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

OBJECTS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMECRM-SRVAC-AVERAGE service activities per YEAR 0 NA NACRM-SRVAC-PEAK service activities per PEAK TIME NA 0 0CRM-CONF-AVERAGE service confirmations per YEAR 0 NA NACRM-CONF-PEAK service confirmations per PEAK TIME NA 0 0

VISITS % ORD ITEMS IPC MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEAVERAGE Internet sales orders and visits per YEAR NA 0 0 No 0 NA NAPEAK Internet sales orders and visits per PEAK TIME NA 0 0 No NA 0 0

USER-BASED SIZING FOR CRM INTERACTION CENTERLOW MEDIUM HIGH ext SAPS GB-Storage

Total users in the Call Center(CIC)-PEAK PER HOUR 0 0

OBJECTS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIME

THRUPUT SIZING FOR CRM SERVICE--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

THRUPUT SIZING FOR CRM E-COMMERCE--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

THRUPUT SIZING FOR CRM IC--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

B72
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour
C72
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour
D72
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour.
E72
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
B77
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of service order quotes(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C77
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D77
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E77
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F77
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B78
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of service order quotes(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C78
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D78
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E78
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G78
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H78
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B79
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of service orders(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C79
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D79
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E79
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F79
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B80
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of service orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C80
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D80
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E80
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G80
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H80
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B81
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of service contracts and contract quotes(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C81
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D81
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E81
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F81
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B82
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of service contracts and contract quotes(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C82
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D82
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E82
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G82
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H82
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B83
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of complaints, returns and inhouse repairs(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C83
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D83
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E83
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F83
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B84
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of complaints, returns and inhouse repairs(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C84
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D84
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E84
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G84
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H84
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B85
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of warranty claims(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C85
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D85
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E85
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F85
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B86
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of warranty claims(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C86
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D86
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E86
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G86
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H86
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B89
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of service activities(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
D89
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E89
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F89
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B90
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of service activities(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D90
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E90
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G90
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H90
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B91
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of service confirmations(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
D91
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E91
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F91
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B92
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of service confirmations(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D92
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E92
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G92
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H92
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B96
If you enter VISITS you must also enter % ORD, ITEMS and MONTHS. Enter the number of VISITS to the internet website for the entire year.
D96
Enter the percentage of times that an Internet website visit results in a customer order.
E96
Enter number of line items PER order. NOT total line items.
F96
No says that the Internet Price Configurator will NOT be used.
G96
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B97
If you enter VISITS you must also enter % ORD, ITEMS ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of VISITS to the internet website during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak VISITS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D97
Enter the percentage of times that an Internet website visit results in a customer order.
E97
Enter number of line items PER order. NOT total line items.
F97
No says that the Internet Price Configurator will NOT be used.
H97
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
I97
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B100
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour
C100
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour
D100
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour.
E100
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
A101
For user-based sizing SAP assumes that the CIC creates additional load. Basic load is created by the business transactions called through CIC, such as Opportunity Management, Activity Management, Sales Transaction, and Service Transaction. Therefore SAP recommends you enter a CIC user in the line for CIC as well as in the line of the respective business transaction.
Page 18: SAP Questionnaire 061510

AVERAGE calls/emails in customer center per YEAR NA 0 NA NAPEAK calls/emails in customer center per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0

USER-BASED SIZING FOR CRM MOBILELOGONS ext SAPS GB-Storage

MSA-USER--Users synchronizing laptops-PEAK PER HOUR 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEAVERAGE orders thru Mobile Sales and Service per YEAR 0 0 NA NAPEAK orders thru Mobile Sales and Service per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

Campaign Execution sizing Guidance Click for sizing white paperBus Part Activities Int Objects e-mails to BW ST TIME END TIME ext SAPS

Profile for Campaign number one 0Profile for Campaign number two 0Profile for Campaign number three 0Profile for Campaign number four 0Profile for Campaign number five 0

TPM-Trade Promotions ManagementPromotions Products Periods Keyfigures Plng Cells Partners PR_REB Rec CDET Rec

CRM ABAP SAPS DB SAPS GB's-MemoryCore TPM process(adding products) 0 0Generation of price/rebate condition records process 0 0Generation of campaign determination condition records process 0 0Rendering the planning layout 0 0Re-synchronizing with SAP NW BW(Saving the promotion) 0 0Total for CRM 0 0 0

SEM/BI ABAP SAPS DB SAPS GB's-Memory GB StorageRendering the planning layout 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR CRM MOBILE--If you complete this section, you must resolve all "ERROR" messages.

B105
If you enter OBJECTS you must also enter MONTHS. Enter all calls and emails(OBJECTS) handled by the customer interaction center for the entire year. This is used to size disk storage.
D105
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E105
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F105
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B106
If you enter OBJECTS you must also enter ST TIME and END TIME. Enter all calls and emails(OBJECTS) handled by the customer interaction center during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
D106
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E106
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G106
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H106
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
E109
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
A110
Enter maximum # of logons per hour for synchronizing laptops only. If you want to size for handhelds or using NetWeaver Mobile please use the MISC tab in this questionnaire.
D110
Enter the maximum logons per hour for laptop synchronization with CRM
B114
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of Mobile Sales and Service Orders(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C114
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D114
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E114
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
F114
Enter the number of MONTHS this data(OBJECTS) will remain online before being archived.
B115
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter LINES and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of Mobile Sales and Service Orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C115
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D115
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E115
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G115
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H115
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A117
This provides you with control over the marketing campaign process, including design, execution, coordination and monitoring. This guidance is based on the SAP white paper dated 2004.
B117
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
I118
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
D119
Will you be creating interaction objects or interactive responses in this campaign?
A126
TPM is used to plan and coordinate temporary marketing activities with retailers. This includes Key Figure Planning with the Volumes/Trade Spends Tab and Condition Record Generation. It is based on the SAP Whitepaper dated December, 2008.
B128
Enter the total number of promotions during the peak hour of the year.
C128
Enter the number of products included in these promotions.
D128
Enter the number of time periods in weeks for these promotions.
E128
Enter the number if key figures in these promotions.
F128
Enter the number of price/rebate condition records. See white paper for determining this.
G128
Enter the number if key figures in these promotions.
H128
Enter the number of price/rebate condition records. See white paper for determining this.
I128
Enter the number of campaign determination condition records. See white paper for determining this.
A129
TPM has a component incorporated within CRM.
B129
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
C129
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
B130
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
C130
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
B131
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
C131
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
B132
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
C132
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
B133
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
C133
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
B134
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
C134
This is the estimated number of SAPS of capacity requirement.
A137
TPM relies on planning information from SEM.
B137
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
C137
These are the estimated SAPS if this workload is adding to an existing SAP CRM system. If this is a new installation, SAP recommends at least 2000 SAPS.
B138
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
C138
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
Page 19: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Re-synchronizing with SAP NW BW(Saving the promotion) 0 0Total for SEM/BI 0 0 0 0

B139
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
C139
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
Page 20: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR NetWeaver BW & SEM

What release of BI/SEM are you implementing 7What time does the AVERAGE workday start 9:00What time does the AVERAGE workday end 18:00What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Enter total CONCURRENT users during the peak hour--A user must NOT be counted twiceHe is either one type of user or another--NOT both at the same time during the peak hourSEM Business Planning

SEM Users STEPS ChngRec Data/Step Data/User ST TIME END TIMEBusiness Planning and Simulations Group 1-PEAK 6 30000 60000 200000 12:00 13:00 Business Planning and Simulations Group 2-PEAK 12 15000 30000 100000 12:00 13:00Business Planning and Simulations Group 3-PEAK 30 5000 10000 25000 12:00 13:00

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing BI 7.0
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B7
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B8
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B22
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D22
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F22
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B23
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D23
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F23
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B35
If you enter USERS all other columns must also be completed. Enter the maximum number of concurrent SEM planning users for this group. This is used to size CPU.
C35
Enter the number of planning STEPS per user. NOT the total STEPS. Default for this group is 6.
D35
Enter the average number of data records manipulated by one single planning STEP. Default for this group is 30000.
E35
Enter the maximum number of data records manipulated by one single planning step. Default for this group is 60000.
F35
Enter the maximum number of data records a user holds in memory simultaneously to change. This is used to estimate memory. Default for this group is 200000.
G35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be starting their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be ending their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this group is the overall Peak End time.
B36
If you enter USERS all other columns must also be completed. Enter the maximum number of concurrent SEM planning users for this group. This is used to size CPU.
C36
Enter the number of planning STEPS per user. NOT the total STEPS. Default for this group is 12.
D36
Enter the average number of data records manipulated by one single planning STEP. Default for this group is 15000.
E36
Enter the maximum number of data records manipulated by one single planning step. Default for this group is 30000.
F36
Enter the maximum number of data records a user holds in memory simultaneously to change. This is used to estimate memory. Default for this group is 100000.
G36
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be starting their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H36
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be ending their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this group is the overall Peak End time.
B37
If you enter USERS all other columns must also be completed. Enter the maximum number of concurrent SEM planning users for this group. This is used to size CPU.
C37
Enter the number of planning STEPS per user. NOT the total STEPS. Default for this group is 30.
D37
Enter the average number of data records manipulated by one single planning STEP. Default for this group is 5000.
E37
Enter the maximum number of data records manipulated by one single planning step. Default for this group is 10000.
F37
Enter the maximum number of data records a user holds in memory simultaneously to change. This is used to estimate memory. Default for this group is 25000.
G37
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be starting their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H37
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be ending their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this group is the overall Peak End time.
Page 21: SAP Questionnaire 061510

0

BW(fill in the number of concurrently active BW users)BW Users % Report % OLAP % Explore Web IP BWA B.P ST TIME END TIME

BW-INFO-typically 71% of all BI users 80 20 0 yes no no 1 NA NABW-BUSIN-typically 26% of all BI users 50 50 0 yes no no 1 NA NABW-EXPERT-typically 3% of all BI users 0 0 100 yes no no 1 NA NA

0

RECORDS ST TIME END TIMEData record uploads NA NA NA NA 0 0

INFOCUBESDIMEN KEY FIG INITIAL PERIODIC PERIODS BWA % MD D Values % DVL % DV1

INFOCUBE-DISK-Duplicate as needed 0 no 10 7

DATASTORE OBJECTSNUMFLD TXTFLD Character WO INITIAL PERIODIC PERIODS

DS OBJECTS-DISK-Duplicate as needed no 0

C41
Enter the percentage of time these users will be viewing predefined, static reports. Default for BI-INFO users is 80%.
D41
Enter the percentage of time these users will be doing OLAP Analysis. Slicing and dicing, navigating in reports, using various aggregates. Default for BI-INFO users is 20%.
E41
Enter the percentage of time these users will be doing Data Exploration. Data mining, ad-hoc reports with unpreditable navigation paths, access of detail data, full table scans.. Default for BI-INFO users is 0%.
F41
In NetWeaver BI reporting can be done either through Excel based BEx Analyzer or through a Web browser which receives HTML documents from a JAVA engines. If these users are BEx enter no. If Web enter yes. If both, insert and copy an additional line for this user type. Default is yes.
G41
Another property of queries which has an impact on sizing is their input capability. Usually, queries used for Integrated Planning are ready for input. If a query can accept input, then you need to check the flag "IP". Like in the case above, you have to create separate lines in table 2 for users who use input queries and for those who don't. Default is no.
H41
If this user type is planning to use BWA enter yes.
I41
Enter the average number of basis providers (InfoCubes which are replicated to BWA) per query used in BWA. Default is 1.
B42
If you enter BI Users you must also enter all other columns or let them default. Enter the maximum number of concurrently active BI-INFO(1 navigation step or 9 SD dialog steps per hour) users during the overall PEAK time of BI activity. This is used to size CPU.
B43
If you enter BI Users you must also enter all other columns or let them default. Enter the maximum number of concurrently active BI-BUSIN(11 navigation steps or 99 SD dialog steps per hour) users during the overall PEAK time of BI activity. This is used to size CPU.
B44
If you enter BI Users you must also enter all other columns or let them default. Enter the maximum number of concurrently active BI-EXPERT(33 navigation steps or 297 SD dialog steps per hour) users during the overall PEAK time of BI activity. This is used to size CPU.
B48
If you enter RECORDS you must also enter ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the PEAK number of BI records that you will be uploading between the ST TIME and END TIME. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G48
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be starting their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H48
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be ending their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this group is the overall Peak End time.
B53
If you enter DIMEN you must enter KEY FIG. You must also enter a value in either INITIAL OR PERIODIC/PERIODS OR both. Enter the number of dimensions(evaluation groups or characteristics) for this CUBE. Maximum is 13.
C53
If you enter KEY FIG you must enter DIMEN. You must also enter a value in either INITIAL OR PERIODIC/PERIODS OR both. Enter the number of key figures, that is--values or quantities, such as sales revenue, fixed costs, sales quantity, number of employees, etc.
D53
Enter the number of records you plan to load into the cube initially.
E53
If you enter a value in PERIODIC you MUST also enter a value in PERIODS. Enter the estimated number of records which you plan to load during your periodic upload process. This number of records will most likely grow over time so plan to enter an estimated average over your time period.
F53
If you enter a value in PERIODS you MUST enter a value in PERIODIC. Enter the total number of periodic uploads which will be kept in the InfoCube before being discarded or archived. For example, if you do a periodic upload weekly and want to keep two years of these uploads, you would enter 52*2 or 104.
G53
Enter yes if this InfoCube should be replicated to BW Accelerator. Default is no.
H53
Enter the percentage of master data on total InfoCube size. Data equals sum of MD and InfoCube data. If master data is shared enter 0 if already considered. Default is 10%.
I53
Enter the average number of different values over all key figure columns.
J53
Enter the percentage of key figures columns with very low number of distinct values (sparse).
K53
Enter the percentage of key figure columns with one distinct value (super spares).
B58
If you enter NUMFLD you must enter a value in either INITIAL OR PERIODIC/PERIODS OR both. Enter the number of numeric fields in the DataStore Object.
C58
If you enter TXTFLDS you must enter a value in either INITIAL OR PERIODIC/PERIODS OR both. Enter the number of text fields in the DataStore Object.
D58
Enter the average length of character fields in the DataStore Objects in Bytes.
E58
Is this Datastore write-optimized?
F58
Enter the number of records you plan to load into the cube initially.
G58
If you enter a value in PERIODIC you MUST enter a value in PERIODS. Enter the estimated number of records which you plan to load during your periodic upload process. This number of records will most likely grow over time so plan to enter an estimated average over your time period.
H58
If you enter a value in PERIODS you MUST enter a value in PERIODIC. Enter the total number of periodic uploads which will be kept in the InfoCube before being discarded or archived. For example, if you do a periodic upload weekly and want to keep two years of these uploads, you would enter 52*2 or 104.
Page 22: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR PORTAL

What release of Enterprise Portal are you implementing 7

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Enter total CONCURRENT users during the peak hour--A user must NOT be counted twiceHe is either one type of user or another--NOT both at the same time during the peak hourEnterprise Portal

USERS Think time Java iViews URL iViewsNW-EP-URL-PEAK 600 0 1NW-EP-INT-PEAK 211 3 0NW-EP-PCC-PEAK 180 3 0NW-EP-PRT-PEAK 0 0 0Total Users 0

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing EP 7.0
B15
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D15
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F15
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B16
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D16
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F16
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B17
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D17
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F17
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B18
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D18
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F18
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
A31
These users are simply using the portal to launch transactions in the back-end system. Portal pages typically contain a single URL iView (no Java iViews). This is an example of a lightweight portal application such as employee or manager self service.
B31
If you enter USERS you must also enter Think time and either Java iViews or URL iViews or both. Enter the maximum number of concurrent URL portal users during the peak hour. This is used to size CPU.
C31
Enter the elapsed time between two successive "clicks" of a user to the portal system. Default for this scenario is 600 seconds.
D31
Enter the number of Java iViews of a typical portal page for this scenario. A Java iView retrieves business content from back-end systems via Jco/RFC and renders the unformatted business content in HTML. Default for this scenario is 0.
E31
Enter the number of URL iViews of a typical portal page for this scenario. For a URL iView, the portal generates the URL and sends it to the browser. The browser then sends the URL to the back-end system and retrieves the HTML content. Default for this scenario is 1.
A32
These users use the portal as an Enterprise Information Portal. They typically read news, access documents, and occasionally launch transactions to OTHER business systems. This is an example of a medium-weight portal application.
B32
If you enter USERS you must also enter Think time and either Java iViews or URL iViews or both. Enter the maximum number of concurrent INT portal users during the peak hour. This is used to size CPU.
C32
Enter the elapsed time between two successive "clicks" of a user to the portal system. Default for this scenario is 211 seconds.
D32
Enter the number of Java iViews of a typical portal page for this scenario. A Java iView retrieves business content from back-end systems via Jco/RFC and renders the unformatted business content in HTML. Default for this scenario is 3.
E32
Enter the number of URL iViews of a typical portal page for this scenario. For a URL iView, the portal generates the URL and sends it to the browser. The browser then sends the URL to the back-end system and retrieves the HTML content. Default for this scenario is 0.
A33
These users use the portal for People-Centric CRM type scenarios. They typically launch BSP-based CRM transactions, display overview information from CRM or BI. This is an example of a medium to heavy-weight portal application.
B33
If you enter USERS you must also enter Think time and either Java iViews or URL iViews or both. Enter the maximum number of concurrent PCC portal users during the peak hour. This is used to size CPU.
C33
Enter the elapsed time between two successive "clicks" of a user to the portal system. Default for this scenario is 180 seconds.
D33
Enter the number of Java iViews of a typical portal page for this scenario. A Java iView retrieves business content from back-end systems via Jco/RFC and renders the unformatted business content in HTML. Default for this scenario is 3.
E33
Enter the number of URL iViews of a typical portal page for this scenario. For a URL iView, the portal generates the URL and sends it to the browser. The browser then sends the URL to the back-end system and retrieves the HTML content. Default for this scenario is 0.
A34
You should use this scenario to define custom scenarios for which you know detailed architecture information of the iViews.
B34
If you enter USERS you must also enter Think time and either Java iViews or URL iViews or both. Enter the maximum number of concurrent PRT portal users during the peak hour. This is used to size CPU.
C34
Enter the elapsed time between two successive "clicks" of a user to the portal system. There is no default for this scenario.
D34
Enter the number of Java iViews of a typical portal page for this scenario. A Java iView retrieves business content from back-end systems via Jco/RFC and renders the unformatted business content in HTML. There is no default for this scenario.
E34
Enter the number of URL iViews of a typical portal page for this scenario. For a URL iView, the portal generates the URL and sends it to the browser. The browser then sends the URL to the back-end system and retrieves the HTML content. There is no default for this scenario.
Page 23: SAP Questionnaire 061510

LOGONSMaximum number of logons per PEAK hour

NetWeaver Portal Knowledge Management and CollaborationAcc Docs New Docs Size Rooms MONTHS ST TIME END TIME

NW-KMC-Documents per TIME Period 0 700 4000 0 NA NANW-KMC-PEAK Documents per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0

B38
Enter the maximum number of users that will logon during the PEAK hour.
B42
Enter the number of documents that are accessed. Accessed means searching, sorting, opening folders, opening documents, viewing document properties, cut&paste, etc. Assumes 45% are accessed from collaboration rooms.
C42
Enter the number of documents created. This includes creation, uploading, copy&paste, create folder, etc. Assumes 45% of new documents are structured in collaboration rooms.
D42
Enter the average file size in KB. Default is 700 KB.
E42
Enter the number of collaboration rooms. 4000 is the default and is the biggest currently known installation.
A43
KM provides a central, role-specific point of entry to unstructured information from various data sources such as text, presentations or HTML files. This information is available thru file servers, intranets or Internets. Access is provided thru the portal. This data may be managed thru SAP Content Server, other content management solutions as well as thru KM facilities. KM uses the search capabilities of TREX. For storage; in addition to the space needed for all content, add 4 kB's for each document stored in KM facilities plus 1MB for each virtual room.
B43
If you enter the number of Accessed Documents you MUST enter New Docs, Size and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of Accessed Documents per time period. A year will usually be too big. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C43
Enter number of New Documents created.
D43
Enter the average sizing in KB of the file.
E43
Enter the number of collaboration rooms.
F43
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A44
KM provides a central, role-specific point of entry to unstructured information from various data sources such as text, presentations or HTML files. This information is available thru file servers, intranets or Internets. Access is provided thru the portal. This data may be managed thru SAP Content Server, other content management solutions as well as thru KM facilities. KM uses the search capabilities of TREX. For storage; in addition to the space needed for all content, add 4 kB's for each document stored in KM facilities plus 1MB for each virtual room.
B44
If you enter the number of Accessed Documents you MUST enter New Docs, Size and ST TIME and END TIME But not MONTHS. These are the average number of Accessed Documents per peak time period. This is used to calculate CPU.
C44
Enter number of New Documents created.
G44
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Documents will start being accessed or created. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H44
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Documents will stop being accessed or created. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 24: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION

What release of PI are you implementing 7What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

PI ADVANCED SIZING FOR INTEGRATION SERVERXML SIZE KB Messages Sync/Async Inbd adap Outb adap Int.S. BPM Pat ST TIME END TIME

PI-INT-SRV-ADVANCED-PEAK per PEAK TIME 0 Asynchronous XI (Proxy) XI (Proxy) no None 0 0

PI NON-CENTRAL ADAPTER ENGINEXML SIZE KB Messages Sync/Async Inbd adap Outb adap Int.S. ST TIME END TIME

PI-ADAPTER-PEAK per PEAK TIME 0 Asynchronous None None no 0 0

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing PI 7.0
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B17
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D17
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F17
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B18
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D18
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F18
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
A29
PI ADVANCED is used when you know quite a bit about how you expect to use PI. You have developed the architecture for PI and understood how PI is going to be used. This requires more knowledge of the expected PI environment.
B31
If you enter XML SIZE KB you must enter Messages, ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the average size of messages for this scenario.
C31
Enter the PEAK number of outbound messages to be processed in a given timeframe for this scenario.
D31
Enter whether the sender application must wait for a successful delivery response from the receiver(synchronous) or whether the sender application does not have to wait(asynchronous). Default is asynchronous.
E31
Inbound adapters receive requests from sending applications. Enter the adapter type from the pull-down list. Default is none.
F31
Outbound adapters send requests to receiving applications. Enter the adapter type from the pull-down list. Default is none.
G31
Is this an integrated scenario? Default is no.
H31
Business Process Management(BPM) allows for specific business processes to be enacted for certain message types. Enter the BPM scenario from the drop-down list. Most BPM scenarios are asynchronous. Default for this is none.
I31
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be starting their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
J31
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be ending their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this group is the overall Peak End time.
A33
PI Non-Central is used to size for specific adapter engines which are separate from central PI. The non-central adapter engine runs on the J2EE engine.
B35
If you enter XML SIZE KB you must enter Messages, ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the average size of messages for this scenario.
C35
Enter the PEAK number of outbound messages to be processed in a given timeframe for this scenario.
D35
Enter whether the sender application must wait for a successful delivery response from the receiver(synchronous) or whether the sender application does not have to wait(asynchronous). Default is asynchronous.
E35
Inbound adapters receive requests from sending applications. Enter the adapter type from the pull-down list. Default is none.
F35
Outbound adapters send requests to receiving applications. Enter the adapter type from the pull-down list. Default is none.
G35
Is this an integrated scenario? Default is no.
H35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be starting their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
I35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these users will be ending their largest planning and simulation work. Default for this group is the overall Peak End time.
Page 25: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR TREX

What release of TREX are you implementing 7What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

THRUPUT SIZING FOR TREXSearches Indexed data Delta Index NA NA ST TIME END TIME

TREX-SRCH-PEAK TREX Searches per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing TREX 7.0. Be aware that as of TREX 7.1, the platform will be Intel (Windows and Linux) only per SAP Note 965097.
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B17
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D17
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F17
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B18
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D18
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F18
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B31
If you enter the number of Searches, you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of TREX Searches processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak Searches are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C31
Enter the number of GB's of storage for the indexed data volume on which the TREX search is performed.
D31
Enter the number of GB's of storage for the delta index run during this time period.
G31
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H31
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 26: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR Solution Manager

What release of Solution Manager are you implementing 7What time does the AVERAGE workday start 12:00 What time does the AVERAGE workday end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

USER SIZING FOR Solution ManagerLOW MEDIUM HIGH

Typically, high users are fewer than 20% of the total for any module. If in doubt put the concurrently active users in the medium category.SOLMAN-IMP-Users in SM Implementation-PEAK PER HOUR

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing TREX 7.0. Be aware that as of TREX 7.1, the platform will be Intel (Windows and Linux) only per SAP Note 965097.
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B17
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D17
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F17
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B18
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D18
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F18
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B30
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour. These users cause only a slight amount of workload so putting users in this category affects the sizing only slightly.
C30
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour. If you're not sure, you might put all of your users in the medium category.
D30
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour. Typically, high users are less than 20% of your total user count for any application.
Page 27: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR SCM

What release of SCM are you implementing 5What time does the AVERAGE workday start 9:00What time does the AVERAGE workday end 18:00What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

QuickSizer customer number QuickSizer project name

THRUPUT SIZING FOR DEMAND PLANNINGCharCom KeyFig Periods Com Index Times Time Buck Pl Vers

TIMESERIES-Planning Area Sizing for LiveCache memory 0 0 0 0

CharCom Time Buck ST TIME END TIMEDP-RUN-Planning Run Sizing for CPU NA NA NA 0 0 0

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing SCM 5.0
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B7
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B8
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B22
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D22
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F22
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B23
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D23
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F23
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
A31
SCM-APO is a highly specialized application requiring significant application knowledge. It is very important that an SAP SCM-APO specialist from either SAP or your implementation partner be involved in completing these SCM-APO questions. We highly recommend that you consider putting your answers in this SCM-APO tab directly into the SAP QuickSizer. The QuickSizer may be found at http://service.sap.com/quicksizing. This site requires an SAP supplied username and password which can be obtained from SAP.
B36
If you enter CharCom you MUST also enter KeyFig and Period. Characteristics are attributes that describe what is planned. Examples include item code, UPC, brand name, market segment, location and customer name. Enter the product of all the characteristics being planned.
C36
Key figures hold the data input and output quantities that are stored in a single fact table for each InfoCube. Examples include sales history, demand forecast and percent promotion increase. Enter the sum of the key figures used in planning.
D36
Periods is the count of time buckets used in planning. An annual forecast in weekly time buckets is 52. Annual forecast of 12 weeks followed by 8 months is 12+8*4=42 because all data is stored in the smallest time unit.
E36
Fill in either Com Index or Times/Periods but not both. Compression index. Enter the expected compression index. Default is 5.
F36
Fill in either Com Index or Times/Periods but not both. Percentage of compressed timeseries.
G36
Fill in either Com Index or Times/Periods but not both. Number of time buckets in compressed timeseries.
H36
Total number of planning versions stored in LiveCache.
B39
If you enter CharCom you MUST also enter Time Buck and ST TIME and END TIME. Characteristics are attributes that describe what is planned. Examples include item code, UPC, brand name, market segment, location and customer name. Enter the product of all the characteristics being planned.
F39
Number of time buckets used in planning.
G39
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H39
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 28: SAP Questionnaire 061510

APO Users ST TIME END TIMEDP-USER-Additional Users for CPU NA NA NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR SUPPLY & PRODUCTION PLANNINGLOC PROD Resources

MASTERDAT-Master data Sizing for LiveCache memory

SCM OBJSTOCK-Warehouse Stocks Sizing for LiveCache memory

SCM OBJ Components OPER ACT/OP ALT/RES ParCapPLANNEDORD-Planned orders Sizing for LiveCache memory 0 0 0

SCM OBJ SUB OBJFORECAST-Forecast orders Sizing for LiveCache memory 0PURCHORD-Purchase orders Sizing for LiveCache memory 0SALES-Sales orders Sizing for LiveCache memory 0TRANSFER-Transfer orders Sizing for LiveCache memory 0

SKUs Time Buck ST TIME END TIMESNP-RUN-Heuristic plan Sizing for CPU--PEAK NA NA NA 0 0 0

APO User ST TIME END TIMEPP USER-Planning Board User Sizing for CPU--PEAK NA NA NA NA 0 0SNP USER-SNP User Sizing for CPU--PEAK NA NA NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR ORDER FULFILLMENTLoc prod

ATP-MD-ATP Masterdata Sizing for LiveCache memory

Requests ST TIME END TIMEATP-SIMPLE-ATP simple checks Sizing for CPU--PEAK NA NA NA NA 0 0ATP-RULE-ATP rules based checks Sizing for CPU--PEAK NA NA NA NA 0 0ATP-CTP-ATP Capable to promise checks Sizing for CPU--PEAK NA NA NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR SERVICE PARTS PLANNINGSKUs ST TIME END TIME

SPP-STK-Stocking--PEAK NA NA NA NA 0 0

B42
If you enter APO Users you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of planners using interactive planning.
G42
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H42
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B46
Total number of product-location(LOC PROD) combinations. Enter the sum of all of the product locations being planned at each location.
C46
Resources used in APO can define work centers, or production lines and tools used in the manufacturing of products. Determine the number of resources used in APO planning for both Supply Network Planning and Detailed Scheduling. Enter the numbers of resources(work centers, production lines, tools) to be planned.
B49
Enter the count of the detailed warehouse stock locations (SCM OBJ) used in planning including any sub locations or batching.
B52
If SCM OBJ is entered you must enter Components, OPER and ACT/OP. Enter the average number of planning relevant planned orders.
C52
The average number of bill of material components per manufacturing order.
D52
Enter the average number of operations per manufacturing order.
E52
Enter the average number of operations steps or activities per operation used for planning.
F52
Enter the average number of alterative resources(production line, work center, etc) that can be used for each activity.
G52
Enter the average number of parallel capacity requirements or constraining resources per operation step/activity.
B55
IF SCM OBJ is entered then SUB OBJ must also be entered. Enter the number of forecast orders(SCM OBJ) used for planning. This is also the total number of product-location combinations.
C55
Enter the average number of schedule lines per forecast or the number of partitions made for each time bucket.
B56
IF SCM OBJ is entered then SUB OBJ must also be entered. Enter the number of purchase orders or purchase requisitions(SCM OBJ) used for planning.
C56
Enter the average number of delivery schedules or transports per purchase order.
B57
IF SCM OBJ is entered then SUB OBJ must also be entered. Enter the number of sales orders(SCM OBJ) used for planning.
C57
Enter the average number of delivery schedules or transports per sales order.
B58
IF SCM OBJ is entered then SUB OBJ must also be entered. Enter the number of internal stock transfer orders(SCM OBJ) used for planning.
C58
Enter the average number of products per transfer order.
B61
If you enter SKUs you MUST also enter Time Buck and ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of SKUs planned in this heuristic planning run.
F61
Number of time buckets used in planning.
G61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B64
If you enter APO Users you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of planners using interactive Planning Board planning.
G64
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H64
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B65
If you enter APO Users you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of planners using interactive Supply Network Planning.
G65
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H65
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A69
Global availability to check(ATP)
B69
Total number of locations for which an availability to promise check is possible.
B72
If you enter Requests you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME and Loc prod. The simple ATP check is carried out based on the ATP quantity (Available-To-Promise). The ATP quantity is calculated from stock, planned receipts (production orders, purchase orders, planned orders and so on), and planned requirements (sales orders, deliveries, reservations and so on). Enter the number of online searches that are done during this time period to ensure that your company can provide the requested product at the requested time in the requested quantity.
G72
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Requests will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H72
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Requests will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B73
If you enter Requests you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME and Loc prod. The rules based ATP check is an iterative process, every check defines the next check according to the rules in the system. Enter the number of online searches that are done during this time period to ensure that your company can provide the requested product at the requested time in the requested quantity.
G73
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Requests will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H73
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Requests will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B74
If you enter Requests you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME and Loc prod. The Capable-to-Promise(CTP) allows you to create planned orders or purchase requisitions for missing products. Enter the number of online searches that are done during this time period to ensure that your company can provide the requested product at the requested time in the requested quantity.
G74
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Requests will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H74
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Requests will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B78
If you enter SKUs you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of SKUs planned for all possible product locations.
G78
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H78
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 29: SAP Questionnaire 061510

SPP-DESTK-Destocking--PEAK NA NA NA NA 0 0SPP-EOQ-Economic order quantity--PEAK NA NA NA NA 0 0SPP-DPLY-Deployment--PEAK NA NA NA NA 0 0

Period Based Planning SKUs Time Buck ST TIME END TIMESPP-FCST-Forecasting--PEAK NA NA NA 0 0 0

DRP Run Matrices ROP Stk PB Stk. M Loc PoD 1 PoD 2 Hor1 SPP-DRP-Distribution requirements planning--PEAK

SNC-Purchase Order CollaborationProfile SAPS Storage

Initial Sizing--See whitepaper on the QuickSizer website 0 0

SNC-Release ProcessingProfile SAPS Storage

Initial Sizing--See whitepaper on the QuickSizer website 0 0

SNC-Supplier Managed Inventory-SNIProfile SAPS Storage

Initial Sizing--See whitepaper on the QuickSizer website 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR INTEGRATION TO ECCSCM objects Items ST TIME END TIME

PI-PROD-PEAK Manufacturing Orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0PI-SALES-PEAK Sales Orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0PI-PURCH-PEAK Purchase Orders per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0PI-STOCKL-PEAK Stock movements per PEAK TIME 1 NA NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR EWM INBOUNDOBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIME

IEWM-DLV-AVERAGE Inbound delivery documents per YEAR 0 0 NA NAIEWM-DLV-PEAK Inbound delivery documents per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

Ware tasks % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEIEWM-UNTSK-AVERAGE creation of unloading tasks per YEAR NA NA 0 NA NAIEWM-UNTSK-PEAK creation of unloading tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0IEWM-CONF-AVERAGE confirm of unloading tasks per YEAR NA NA 0 NA NA

B79
If you enter SKUs you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of SKUs planned for all possible product locations.
G79
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H79
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B80
If you enter SKUs you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of SKUs planned for all stocked product locations.
G80
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H80
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B81
If you enter SKUs you MUST also enter ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of SKUs planned for all product locations along the bill of distribution.
G81
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H81
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B84
If you enter SKUs you MUST also enter Time Buck and ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the number of SKUs planned for historical and planning horizon in monthly or weekly buckets.
F84
Number of time buckets used in planning.
G84
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H84
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B87
If you enter Matrices you MUST also enter Loc and ST TIME and END TIME. Enter the total number of Matrices both stocked and unstocked calculated by DRP.
C87
Number of reorder point based matrices which are stocked
D87
Number of period based matrices which are stocked
E87
Average number of locations in the BoD-subtree below an entry location including the entry location.
F87
PoD/EOQ days on entry location.
G87
PoD/EOQ days on entry location.
H87
Freeze Horizon in working days.
B91
Enter the appropriate profile: Small = Up to 10 concurrent users. Medium = Up to 50 concurrent users. Medium = Up to 100 concurrent users.
B95
Enter the appropriate profile: Small = Up to 50 concurrent users. Medium = Up to 150 concurrent users. Medium = Up to 250 concurrent users.
B99
Enter the appropriate profile: Small = Up to 50 concurrent users. Medium = Up to 150 concurrent users. Medium = Up to 250 concurrent users.
B104
If you enter the number of SCM objects you MUST enter Items and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the PEAK number of production orders transferred from/to the ECC system.
C104
Enter the average number of components in the production order(Items)
G104
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Messages will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H104
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Messages will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B105
If you enter the number of SCM objects you MUST enter Items and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the PEAK number of sales orders transferred from/to the ECC system.
C105
Enter the average number of schedule lines in the sales order(Items)
G105
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Messages will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H105
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Messages will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B106
If you enter the number of SCM objects you MUST enter Items and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the PEAK number of purchase orders transferred from/to the ECC system.
C106
Enter the average number of schedule lines in the purchase order(Items)
G106
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Messages will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H106
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Messages will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B107
If you enter the number of SCM objects you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the PEAK number of stock movements transferred from/to the ECC system. Items is set at 1.
C107
Enter the average number of stock movements(Items). This is always 1.
G107
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Messages will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H107
Enter the time of day that the peak of these Messages will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A111
Mandatory--Inbound Step--Creation of Inbound Delivery
B111
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of delivery documents(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C111
Enter the average number of ITEMS per delivery. NOT total line items.
D111
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E111
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F111
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A112
Mandatory--Inbound Step--Creation of Inbound Delivery
B112
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of delivery documents(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C112
Enter the average number of ITEMS per delivery. NOT total line items.
D112
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E112
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G112
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H112
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A115
Optional--Inbound Steps--Creation of Unloading Warehouse Tasks.
B115
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of creations of unloading warehouse tasks. These are assumed to be 100% RF. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
E115
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F115
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A116
Optional--Inbound Steps--Creation of Unloading Warehouse Tasks.
B116
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of creations of unloading warehouse tasks processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. These are assumed to be 100% RF. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
E116
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G116
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H116
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A117
Optional--Inbound Steps--Confirmation of Unloading Warehouse Tasks.
B117
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of confirmations of unloading warehouse tasks. These are assumed to be 100% RF. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
E117
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F117
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
Page 30: SAP Questionnaire 061510

IEWM-CONF-PEAK confirm of unloading tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0

Ware tasks % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEIEWM-PATSK-AVERAGE creation of putaway tasks per YEAR NA NA 0 NA NAIEWM-PATSK-PEAK creation of putaway tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0

Ware tasks % RF % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEIEWM-PACON-AVERAGE confirm of putaway tasks per YEAR NA 0 NA NAIEWM-PACON-PEAK confirm of putaway tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0

Ware tasks RsChg % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEIEWM-RESPA-AVERAGE chg/resource of putaway tasks per YEAR NA 0 NA NAIEWM-RESPA-PEAK chg/resource of putaway tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0

HU's Put. It. Unpk Items % DISP ST TIME END TIMEIEWM-DECON-AVERAGE unpacking of putaway tasks per YEAR 0 NA NA NAIEWM-DECON-PEAK unpacking of putaway tasks per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

Ware tasks % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEIEWM-MOVE-AVERAGE move warehouse tasks per YEAR NA NA 0 NA NAIEWM-MOVE-PEAK move warehouse tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0

Ware tasks RsChg % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEIEWM-RESFI-AVERAGE chg/resource of packing tasks per YEAR 0 NA 0 NA NAIEWM-RESFI-PEAK chg/resource of packing tasks per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR EWM OUTBOUNDOBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIME

OEWM-DLV-AVERAGE Outbound delivery documents per YEAR 0 0 NA NAOEWM-DLV-PEAK Outbound delivery documents per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

Ware tasks % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEOEWM-PICK-AVERAGE creation of picking tasks per YEAR NA NA 0 NA NAOEWM-PICK-PEAK creation of picking tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0

Ware tasks % RF % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEOEWM-CONF-AVERAGE confirmation of picking tasks per YEAR NA 0 NA NAOEWM-CONF-PEAK confirmation of picking tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA 0 0

A118
Optional--Inbound Steps--Confirmation of Unloading Warehouse Tasks.
B118
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of confirmations of unloading warehouse tasks processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. These are assumed to be 100% RF. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
E118
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G118
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H118
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A121
Mandatory--Inbound Step--Creation of Putaway Warehouse Tasks (Without Preceding Unloading Task)
B121
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of putaway tasks without preceding unloading warehouse task. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
E121
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F121
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A122
Mandatory--Inbound Step--Creation of Putaway Warehouse Tasks (Without Preceding Unloading Task)
B122
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of putaway tasks without preceding unloading warehouse task during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
E122
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G122
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H122
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A125
Mandatory--Inbound Step--Confirmation of Putaway Warehouse Tasks.
B125
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of confirmation of putaway tasks. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C125
Enter the percentage of these Ware task confirmations that are RF based.
E125
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F125
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A126
Mandatory--Inbound Step--Confirmation of Putaway Warehouse Tasks.
B126
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of confirmations of putaway tasks during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C126
Enter the percentage of these Ware task confirmations that are RF based.
E126
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G126
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H126
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A129
Optional--Inbound Step--Change of Resource in Putaway Task.
B129
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of warehouse tasks with resource changes per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C129
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task.
E129
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F129
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A130
Optional--Inbound Step--Change of Resource in Putaway Task.
B130
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of warehouse tasks with resource changes during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C130
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task.
E130
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G130
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H130
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A133
Optional--Inbound Step--Deconsolidation ((Un)Packing and Creation of Follow-Up Move Warehouse Task for Putaway)
B133
If you enter the number of highest-level handling units(HU's) after deconsolidation you MUST enter putaway items (Put. It.) but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of HU's per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C133
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task.
D133
Enter the number of unpacked items.
E133
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
A134
Optional--Inbound Step--Deconsolidation ((Un)Packing and Creation of Follow-Up Move Warehouse Task for Putaway)
B134
If you enter the number of highest-level handling units(HU's) you MUST enter putaway items (Put. It.) and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of HU's during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C134
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task.
D134
Enter the number of unpacked items.
E134
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G134
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H134
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A137
Optional--Inbound Step--Move Warehouse Task (From Deconsolidation Station to Final Bin)
B137
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of warehouse tasks from deconsolidation station to final bin per year. 100% RF is assumed This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
E137
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F137
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A138
Optional--Inbound Step--Move Warehouse Task (From Deconsolidation Station to Final Bin)
B138
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of move warehouse tasks from deconsolidation station to final bin during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. 100% RF is assumed. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
E138
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G138
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H138
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A141
Optional--Inbound Step--Change of Resource in Movement from Deconsolidation Packing to Final Bin.
B141
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter resource changes(RsChg) and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of warehouse tasks with resource changes per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C141
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task.
E141
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F141
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A142
Optional--Inbound Step--Change of Resource in Movement from Deconsolidation Packing to Final Bin.
B142
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter resource changes (RsChg) and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of warehouse tasks with resource changes during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C142
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task.
E142
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G142
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H142
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A146
Mandatory--Outbound Step--Creation of Outbound Delivery Order
B146
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of delivery documents(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C146
Enter the average number of ITEMS per delivery. NOT total line items.
D146
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E146
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F146
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A147
Mandatory--Outbound Step--Creation of Outbound Delivery Order
B147
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of delivery documents(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C147
Enter the average number of ITEMS per delivery. NOT total line items.
D147
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E147
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G147
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H147
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A150
Mandatory--Outbound Steps--Creation of Picking Warehouse Tasks.
B150
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of creations of unloading warehouse tasks. These are assumed to be 100% RF. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
E150
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F150
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A151
Mandatory--Outbound Steps--Creation of Picking Warehouse Tasks.
B151
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of creations of unloading warehouse tasks processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. These are assumed to be 100% RF. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
E151
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G151
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H151
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A154
Mandatory--Outbound Step--Confirmation of Picking Warehouse Tasks.
B154
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of putaway tasks without preceding unloading warehouse task. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C154
Enter the percentage of these Ware task confirmations that are RF based.
E154
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F154
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A155
Mandatory--Outbound Step--Confirmation of Picking Warehouse Tasks.
B155
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of putaway tasks without preceding unloading warehouse task during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C155
Enter the percentage of these Ware task confirmations that are RF based.
E155
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G155
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H155
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 31: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Ware tasks % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEOEWM-DEST-AVERAGE move warehouse tasks per YEAR NA NA 0 NA NAOEWM-DEST-PEAK move warehouse tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0

Ware tasks RsChg % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEOEWM-RESPI-AVERAGE chg/resource of picking tasks per YEAR 0 NA 0 NA NAOEWM-RESPI-PEAK chg/resource of picking tasks per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA 0 0

HU's Pick It. % DISP ST TIME END TIMEOEWM-PACK-AVERAGE packing tasks per YEAR 0 NA NA NA NAOEWM-PACK-PEAK packing tasks per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA 0 0

Ware tasks % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEOEWM-STAGE-AVERAGE move warehouse tasks per YEAR NA NA 0 NA NAOEWM-STAGE-PEAK move warehouse tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0

Ware tasks RsChg % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEOEWM-RESST-AVERAGE chg/resource tasks per YEAR 0 NA 0 NA NAOEWM-RESST-PEAK chg/resource tasks per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA 0 0

Ware tasks % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEOEWM-LOAD-AVERAGE warehouse loading tasks per YEAR NA NA 0 NA NAOEWM-LOAD-PEAK warehouse loading tasks per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEOEWM-GOODS-AVERAGE Outbound delivery documents per YEAR 0 0 NA NAOEWM-GOODS-PEAK Outbound delivery documents per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

A158
Optional--Outbound Step--Move Warehouse Task (From Picking Resource to Picking Destination Bin)
B158
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of move warehouse tasks from resource to picking destination. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
E158
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F158
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A159
Optional--Outbound Step--Move Warehouse Task (From Picking Resource to Picking Destination Bin)
B159
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of move warehouse tasks from resource to picking destination during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
E159
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G159
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H159
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A162
Optional--Outbound Step--Change of Resource in Picking Task.
B162
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter RsChg and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of warehouse tasks with resource changes per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row. Assumed 100% RF.
C162
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task.
E162
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F162
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A163
Optional--Outbound Step--Change of Resource in Picking Task.
B163
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter RsChg and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of warehouse tasks with resource changes during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. Assumed 100% RF
C163
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task.
E163
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G163
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H163
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A166
Optional--Outbound Step--Packing and Creation of Follow-Up Move Warehouse Task.
B166
If you enter the number of highest-level handling units(HU's) you MUST enter putaway items (Put. It.) but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of HU's created in packing per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C166
Enter the average number of pick items packed per ship highest-level HU.
E166
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
A167
Optional--Outbound Step--Packing and Creation of Follow-Up Move Warehouse Task.
B167
If you enter the number of highest-level handling units(HU's) you MUST enter putaway items (Put. It.) and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of HU's created in packing during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C167
Enter the average number of pick items packed per ship highest-level HU.
E167
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G167
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H167
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A170
Optional--Outbound Step--Move Warehouse Task (From Packing Station to Staging Areas)
B170
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of staging original warehouse tasks per year. 100% RF is assumed This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
E170
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F170
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A171
Optional--Outbound Step--Move Warehouse Task (From Packing Station to Staging Areas)
B171
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of staging original warehouse tasks during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. 100% RF is assumed. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
E171
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G171
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H171
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A174
Optional--Outbound Step--Change of Resource in Staging.
B174
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter resource changes(RsChg) and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of warehouse tasks with resource changes per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C174
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task. Assume 100% RF.
E174
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F174
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A175
Optional--Outbound Step--Change of Resource in Staging.
B175
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter resource changes (RsChg) and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of warehouse tasks with resource changes during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C175
Enter the average number of resource changes per Ware task. Assume 100% RF
E175
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G175
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H175
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A178
Optional--Outbound Step--Loading Warehouse Task.
B178
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of loading warehouse tasks per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row. Assume 100% RF.
E178
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F178
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A179
Optional--Outbound Step--Loading Warehouse Task.
B179
If you enter the number of warehouse tasks(Ware tasks), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of loading warehouse tasks during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. Assume 100% RF.
E179
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G179
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H179
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A182
Mandatory--Outbound Step--Delivery based Goods Issue.
B182
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of delivery documents(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C182
Enter the average number of ITEMS per delivery. NOT total line items.
D182
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E182
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F182
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A183
Mandatory--Outbound Step--Delivery based Goods Issue.
B183
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of delivery documents(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C183
Enter the average number of ITEMS per delivery. NOT total line items.
D183
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E183
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G183
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H183
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 32: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR SRM

What release of SRM are you implementing 7What time does the AVERAGE workday start 9:00What time does the AVERAGE workday end 18:00What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Operational PurchasingActive Users - Standard Sizing

LOW MEDIUM HIGHSRM-PO-1U-Users in SRM(PO with few complex steps)SRM-PO-2U-Users in SRM(PO with many simple steps)SRM-OSC-U-Users in SRM Occasional Shopping CartSRM-PSC-1U-Users in SRM shopping cart(few complex steps)SRM-PSC-2U-Users in SRM shopping cart(many simple steps)

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing SRM 7
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B7
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B8
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B22
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D22
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F22
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B23
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D23
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F23
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B33
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour
C33
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour
D33
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour.
Page 33: SAP Questionnaire 061510

SRM-CONF-U-Users in SRM ConfirmationSRM-INV-U-Users in SRM InvoiceTOTAL CONCURRENT Peak users 0 0 0 0

THRUPUT - Standard SizingOBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIME

SRM-PO-1-SRM Purchase Order with few complex steps 0 0 NA NASRM-PO-1-SRM Purchase Order with few complex steps 0 NA 0 0SRM-PO-2-SRM Purchase Order with many simple steps 0 0 NA NASRM-PO-2-SRM Purchase Order with many simple steps 0 NA 0 0SRM-OSC-SRM Occasional Shopping Cart 0 0 NA NASRM-OSC-SRM Occasional Shopping Cart 0 NA 0 0SRM-PSC-1-SRM Shopping Cart with few complex steps 0 0 NA NASRM-PSC-1-SRM Shopping Cart with few complex steps 0 NA 0 0SRM-PSC-2-SRM Shopping Cart with many simple steps 0 0 NA NASRM-PSC-2-SRM Shopping Cart with many simple steps 0 NA 0 0SRM-CONF-SRM Confirmation 0 0 NA NASRM-CONF-SRM Confirmation 0 NA 0 0SRM-INV-SRM Invoice 0 0 NA NASRM-INV-SRM Invoice 0 NA 0 0

Strategic PurchasingActive Users - Standard Sizing

LOW MEDIUM HIGHSRM-CTR-LU-Users in SRM Lean Contract ManagementSRM-CTR-EU-Users in SRM Extended Contract ManagementSRM-RFX-LU-Users in Lean SRM RFxSRM-RFX-EU-Users in Extended SRM RFxTOTAL CONCURRENT Peak users 0 0 0 0

THRUPUT - Standard SizingOBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIME

SRM-CTR-L-Lean Contract Management-Contract 0 0 NA NASRM-CTR-L-Lean Contract Management-Contract 0 NA 0 0SRM-CTR-E-Extended Contract Management-Contract 0 0 NA NASRM-CTR-E-Extended Contract Management-Contract 0 NA 0 0SRM-RFX-L-SRM Lean RFx 0 0 NA NASRM-RFX-L-SRM Lean RFx 0 NA 0 0SRM-RFX-E-SRM Extended RFx 0 0 NA NA

B45
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of contracts or agreements(GOA) (OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C45
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D45
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E45
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F45
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B46
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of contracts or agreements(GOA)(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C46
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D46
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E46
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G46
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H46
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B47
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of plan-driven customer orders (OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C47
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D47
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E47
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F47
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B48
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of plan-driven customer orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C48
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D48
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E48
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G48
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H48
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B49
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of self-service orders(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C49
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D49
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E49
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F49
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B50
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of self-service orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C50
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D50
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E50
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G50
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H50
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B51
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of extended orers(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C51
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D51
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E51
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F51
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B52
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of extended orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C52
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D52
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E52
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G52
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H52
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B53
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of services orders(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C53
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D53
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E53
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F53
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B54
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of extended orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C54
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D54
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E54
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G54
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H54
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B55
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of services orders(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C55
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D55
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E55
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F55
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B56
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of extended orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C56
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D56
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E56
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G56
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H56
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B57
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of services orders(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C57
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D57
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E57
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F57
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B58
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of services orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C58
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D58
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E58
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G58
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H58
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B62
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour
C62
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour
D62
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour.
B71
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of contracts or agreements(GOA) (OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C71
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D71
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E71
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F71
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B72
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of contracts or agreements(GOA)(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C72
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D72
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E72
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G72
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H72
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B73
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of plan-driven customer orders (OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C73
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D73
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E73
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F73
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B74
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of plan-driven customer orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C74
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D74
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E74
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G74
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H74
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B75
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of self-service orders(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C75
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D75
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E75
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F75
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B76
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of self-service orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C76
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D76
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E76
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G76
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H76
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B77
If you enter the number of OBJECTS you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of extended orers(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C77
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D77
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E77
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F77
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
Page 34: SAP Questionnaire 061510

SRM-RFX-E-SRM Extended RFx 0 NA 0 0

B78
If you enter the number of OBJECTS, you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of extended orders(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C78
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D78
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E78
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G78
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H78
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 35: SAP Questionnaire 061510

END TIME

END TIME

Page 36: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR GTS

What release of GTS are you implementing 2007What time does the AVERAGE workday start 9:00What time does the AVERAGE workday end 18:00What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

THRUPUT SIZING FOR COMPLIANCE AND CUSTOM MANAGEMENT

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEGTS-CUMA-AVERAGE Customs management contracts per YEAR 0 0 NA NAGTS-CUMA-PEAK Customs management contracts per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0GTS-SLS-AVERAGE Compliance management per YEAR 0 0 NA NA

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
SAP Qser is currently sizing GTS 2007
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B7
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B8
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B22
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D22
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F22
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B23
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D23
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F23
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
A34
GTS Customs Documents (Import/Export Customs Declarations and Customs Shipments, Transit Documents)
B34
If you enter the number of customs documents(OBJECTS) you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of customs documents(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C34
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D34
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E34
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F34
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A35
GTS Customs Documents (Import/Export Customs Declarations and Customs Shipments, Transit Documents)
B35
If you enter the number of customs documents(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of customs documents(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C35
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D35
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E35
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A36
GTS Compliance Documents (Sales Orders, Deliveries, Purchase Orders)
B36
If you enter the number of compliance documents(OBJECTS) you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of compliance documents(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C36
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D36
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E36
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F36
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
Page 37: SAP Questionnaire 061510

GTS-SLS-PEAK Plan-Compliance management per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0GTS-FI-PR-AVERAGE Screenings of payment proposals per YEAR 0 0 NA NAGTS-FI-PEAK Screening of payment run per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

OBJECTS MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEGTS-BP-AVERAGE Business Partners per YEAR NA NA NA 0 NA NAGTS-BP-PEAK Business Partners per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0GTS-MAT-AVERAGE GTS Materials per YEAR NA NA NA 0 NA NAGTS-MAT-PEAK GTS Materials per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0

Bus Partner Documents MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEGTS-SCREEN-AVERAGE Business Partner screenings per YEAR 0 NA NA 0 NA NAGTS-SCREEN-PEAK Business Partner screenings per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR GLOBAL TRADE SERVICE RISK MANAGEMENT

OBJECTS ITEMS % CHG % DISP MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEGTS-RI-BOM-AVERAGE BOM transfers per YEAR 0 0 NA NAGTS-RI-BOM-PEAK BOM transfers per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0GTS-RI-INV-AVERAGE worklist based on SD Invoices per YEAR 0 0 NA NAGTS-RI-INV-PEAK worklist based on SD Invoices per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0GTS-RI-MM-AVERAGE worklist based on MM per YEAR 0 0 NA NAGTS-RI-MM-PEAK worklist based on MM per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0GTS-RI-PRD-AVERAGE BOM Preference determination per YEAR 0 0 NA NAGTS-RI-PRD-PEAK BOM Preference determination per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0GTS-RI-SO-AVERAGE SD/SO Preference determination per YEAR 0 0 NA NAGTS-RI-SO-PEAK SD/SO Preference determination per PEAK TIME 0 NA 0 0

Customers Prod/cust % CHG MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEGTS-RI-ISS-AVERAGE vendor declarations per YEAR 0 NA 0 NA NAGTS-RI-ISS-PEAK vendor declarations per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA 0 0

Vendors Prod/vend MONTHS ST TIME END TIMEGTS-RI-AGG-AVERAGE vendor declarations per YEAR 0 NA NA 0 NA NAGTS-RI-AGG-PEAK vendor declarations per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0GTS-RI-SOL-AVERAGE vendor solicitations per YEAR 0 NA NA 0 NA NA

A37
GTS Compliance Documents (Sales Orders, Deliveries, Purchase Orders)
B37
If you enter the number of compliance documents(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of compliance documents(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C37
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D37
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E37
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G37
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H37
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A38
Screening of payment proposals(Sanctioned Party List Screening for Financial Accounting)
B38
If you enter the number of screening of payment proposal documents(OBJECTS) you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of screening of payments proposal documents(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C38
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D38
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E38
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F38
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A39
Screening of payment run.
B39
If you enter the number of screening of payment documents(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of screening of payments documents(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C39
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D39
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E39
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G39
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H39
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A42
GTS Business Partners Master data (Vendors, Customers, Employees, etc)
B42
If you enter the number of business partners(OBJECTS) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of business partners(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
F42
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A43
GTS Business Partners Master data (Vendors, Customers, Employees, etc)
B43
If you enter the number of business partners(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of business partners(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G43
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H43
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B44
If you enter the number of GTS materials(OBJECTS) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of GTS Materials(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
F44
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B45
If you enter the number of GTS Materials(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of GTS materials(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G45
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H45
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A48
GTS Sanctioned Party list screening. Asynchronous or Delta screening of business partners.
B48
If you enter the number of business partners(Bus Partner) you MUST enter Documents and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of business partners(Bus Partner) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C48
Enter number of documents PER Bus Partner. NOT total documents
F48
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A49
GTS Sanctioned Party list screening. Asynchronous or Delta screening of business partners.
B49
If you enter the number of business partners(Bus Partner), you MUST enter Documents and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of business partners(Bus Partner) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C49
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
G49
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H49
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A54
For transferring Bills of Materials.
B54
If you enter the number of BOMs transfers(OBJECTS) you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of BOM transfers(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C54
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D54
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E54
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F54
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A55
For transferring Bills of Materials.
B55
If you enter the number of BOM transfers(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of BOM transfers(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C55
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D55
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E55
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G55
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H55
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A56
Worklist for issuing long-term vendor declarations based on SD Invoices. For Invoice Documents being sent to GTS. In case the Invoice Documents are also to be processed within SAP GTS Customs, you should make a separate entry in GTS-CUM.
B56
If you enter the number of worklists(OBJECTS) you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of worklists for issuing long-term vendor declarations based on SD Invoices(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C56
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D56
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E56
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F56
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A57
Worklist for issuing long-term vendor declarations based on SD Invoices. For Invoice Documents being sent to GTS. In case the Invoice Documents are also to be processed within SAP GTS Customs, you should make a separate entry in GTS-CUM.
B57
If you enter the number of worklists(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of worklists for issuing long-term vendor declarations based on SD Invoices.(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C57
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D57
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E57
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G57
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H57
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A58
Worklist for requesting long-term vendor declarations based on MM Purchase Orders and MM Goods Receipts . For MM Documents (Purchase Orders and Goods Receipts) being sent to GTS. In case the Purchase Orders are also to be screened with SAP GTS Compliance, you should make a separate entry in GTS-SLS.
B58
If you enter the number of worklists(OBJECTS) you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of worklists for requesting long-term vendor declarations based on MM Purchase Orders and MM Goods Receipts.(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C58
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D58
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E58
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F58
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A59
Worklist for requesting long-term vendor declarations based on MM Purchase Orders and MM Goods Receipts . For MM Documents (Purchase Orders and Goods Receipts) being sent to GTS. In case the Purchase Orders are also to be screened with SAP GTS Compliance, you should make a separate entry in GTS-SLS.
B59
If you enter the number of worklists(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of worklists for requesting long-term vendor declarations based on MM Purchase Orders and MM Goods Receipts.(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C59
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D59
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E59
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G59
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H59
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A60
For the preference determination of in house production according to Bills of Materials (BOMs).
B60
If you enter the number of (OBJECTS) you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of preference determination of bills of material(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C60
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D60
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E60
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F60
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A61
For the preference determination of in house production according to Bills of Materials (BOMs).
B61
If you enter the number of (OBJECTS), you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of preference determination of bills of material(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C61
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D61
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E61
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A62
For Sales Orders Documents being sent to GTS. In case the Sales Orders are also to be screened with SAP GTS Compliance, you should make a seprate entry in GTS-SLS.
B62
If you enter the number of (OBJECTS) you MUST enter ITEMS and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of preference status determination in the sales process (SD SO)(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C62
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D62
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
E62
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is displayed before it is archived.
F62
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A63
For Sales Orders Documents being sent to GTS. In case the Sales Orders are also to be screened with SAP GTS Compliance, you should make a seprate entry in GTS-SLS.
B63
If you enter the number of (OBJECTS), you MUST enter ITEMS and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of preference status determination in the sales process (SD SO)(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C63
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D63
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
E63
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is displayed before it is archived.
G63
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H63
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A66
For issuing and revocation of long-term vendor declarations.
B66
If you enter the number of customers(Customers) you MUST enter Prod/cust and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of customers(Customers) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C66
Enter number of products per customer. NOT total products.
D66
Enter the percentage of time that a typical object is changed before it is archived.
F66
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A67
For issuing and revocation of long-term vendor declarations.
B67
If you enter the number of customers(Customers), you MUST enter Prod/cust and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of customers(Customers) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak Customers are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C67
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
D67
Enter the percentage of time that a typical OBJECT is changed before it is archived.
G67
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H67
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A70
Aggregation of long-term vendor declarations. For the preference status aggregation into the GTS product master based on long-term vendor declarations.
B70
If you enter the number of vendors(Vendors) you MUST enter Prod/vend and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of customers(Customers) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C70
Enter number of products per vendor. NOT total products.
F70
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A71
Aggregation of long-term vendor declarations. For the preference status aggregation into the GTS product master based on long-term vendor declarations.
B71
If you enter the number of vendors(Vendors), you MUST enter Prod/vend and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of vendors(Vendors) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak Vendors are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C71
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
G71
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H71
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A72
Request of long-term vendor declaration. For the solicitation of long-term vendor declarations.
B72
If you enter the number of vendors(Vendors) you MUST enter Prod/vend and MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of vendors(Vendors) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C72
Enter number of products per vendor. NOT total products.
F72
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
Page 38: SAP Questionnaire 061510

GTS-RI-SOL-PEAK vendor solicitations per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0

A73
Request of long-term vendor declaration. For the solicitation of long-term vendor declarations.
B73
If you enter the number of vendors(Vendors), you MUST enter Prod/vend and ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of vendors (Vendors) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak Vendors are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C73
Enter number of line ITEMS PER OBJECT. NOT total line items.
G73
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H73
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 39: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR Banking

What time does the AVERAGE workday start 9:00What time does the AVERAGE workday end 18:00What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

THRUPUT SIZING FOR ANALYTICAL BANKING

OBJECTS ST TIME END TIMEFT/FI-PEAK Financial transactions per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0POSITION- PEAK Changed positions per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0REG-REPORT-PEAK Regulatory data per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0

OBJECTS MONTHSPOSITION-AVERAGE Changed positions per YEAR NA NA NA 0

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B7
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B18
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D18
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F18
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B22
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D22
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F22
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
A33
Upload of the financial data from the front office systems to the source data layer (SDL): For the calculation of the risk weighted assets.
B33
If you enter the number of transactions(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of new or changed business transactions or instruments(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G33
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H33
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A34
Upload of the financial data from the front office systems to the source data layer (SDL): For the calculation of the risk weighted assets.
B34
If you enter the number of changed positions(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of changed positions(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G34
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H34
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A35
Regulatory reporting consists of writing the enriched data to the cluster and creating a file on the file system. Only the writing of the enriched data is considered in this sizing.
B35
If you enter the regulatory data (OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of regulatory documents(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A38
Upload of the financial data from the front office systems to the source data layer (SDL): For the calculation of the risk weighted assets.
B38
If you enter the number of positions(OBJECTS) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of changed positions(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
F38
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
Page 40: SAP Questionnaire 061510

OBJECTS Collat/Claims Lines MONTHS Eff matur Cash flow ST TIMECE-RUN-AVERAGE payments on cash flow per YEAR 0 0 0 NA NA NACE-RUN-PEAK payments on cash flow per PEAK TIME NA NA 0

OBJECTS Level 2 ST TIME END TIMEDR-RUN-PEAK Disclosure/reporting documents per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0

THRUPUT SIZING FOR CORE BANKING

OBJECTS MONTHSFS-BK-PST-AVERAGE Processing payments items per YEAR NA NA NA 0FS-BK-SETT-AVERAGE Processing payments items per YEAR NA NA NA 0FS-BK-CORR-AVERAGE Processing payments items per YEAR NA NA NA 0FS-BK-ACCR-AVERAGE Processing payments items per YEAR NA NA NA 0

OBJECTS ST TIME END TIMEFS-BK-MPST-PEAK Processing payments items per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0FS-BK-SPST-PEAK Processing payments items per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0FS-BK-STAT-PEAK Processing payments items per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0FS-BK-SETT-PEAK Processing payments items per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0FS-BK-CORR-PEAK Processing payments items per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0FS-BK-ACCR-PEAK Processing payments items per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0

Coll agree Loans ST TIME END TIMEFS-BK-CMS-PEAK Loans per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0

A41
For calculating the risk weighted assets (RWA) in accordance with the Basel II paper and meets the requirements for regulatory reporting.
B41
If you enter the number of payments(OBJECTS) you MUST also enter Collat/Claims, Lines, MONTHS but NOT Eff matur, Cash flow, ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of financial transactions or instruments, and objects that are relevant for effective maturity(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C41
Enter number of collaterals and claims to be processed.
D41
Enter the number of free lines.
E41
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A42
For calculating the risk weighted assets (RWA) in accordance with the Basel II paper and meets the requirements for regulatory reporting.
B42
These are the number of payments(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C42
Enter number of collaterals and claims to be processed during this peak time period.
F42
Enter the number of documents that are relevant for effective maturity to be processed during this peak time period.
G42
Enter the number of cash flow documents to be processed during this peak time period.
H42
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
A45
Data from SDL plus results of the calculation process stored in the RDL and other SAP or non-SAP systems is extracted into BI for reporting.
B45
If you enter the data(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of objects (OBJECTS)extracted for D&R reporting during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C45
Enter the number of level 2 results.
G45
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H45
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A50
This is the processing of payment items which includes the validation of the payment items, the posting to the dedicated account, and subsequently the update of balances for the account.
B50
If you enter the number of payment items(OBJECTS) you MUST enter MONTHS. These are the average number of payments items(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
F50
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A51
The settlement process embraces the calculation of interest and period charges for an account and the posting of the results to the settled or a deviate account.
B51
If you enter the number of accounts(OBJECTS) you MUST enter MONTHS. These are the average number of accounts to be settled(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
F51
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A52
The correspondence process embraces the creation of all types of customer correspondences (bank statements, correspondences for contract changes, correspondences for special posting events. This is started asynchronously daily.
B52
If you enter the number of documents(OBJECTS) you MUST enter MONTHS. These are the average number of created correspondence documents(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
F52
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A53
The accrual process embraces the calculation of interest and periodic charges for an account.
B53
If you enter the number of positions(OBJECTS) you MUST enter MONTHS but NOT ST TIME and END TIME. These are the average number of changed positions(OBJECTS) per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
F53
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A56
This is the processing of payment items which includes the validation of the payment items, the posting to the dedicated account, and subsequently the update of balances for the account.
B56
If you enter the number of payments(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of mass posting payments(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G56
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H56
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A57
This is the processing of payment items which includes the validation of the payment items, the posting to the dedicated account, and subsequently the update of balances for the account.
B57
If you enter the number of payments(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of single posting payments(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G57
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H57
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A58
This is the processing of payment items which includes the validation of the payment items, the posting to the dedicated account, and subsequently the update of balances for the account.
B58
If you enter the number of statements(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of on request bank statements(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G58
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H58
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A59
This is the processing of payment items which includes the validation of the payment items, the posting to the dedicated account, and subsequently the update of balances for the account.
B59
If you enter the number of accounts(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of accounts to be settled(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G59
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H59
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A60
This is the processing of payment items which includes the validation of the payment items, the posting to the dedicated account, and subsequently the update of balances for the account.
B60
If you enter the number of correspondences(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of created correspondences(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G60
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H60
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A61
This is the processing of payment items which includes the validation of the payment items, the posting to the dedicated account, and subsequently the update of balances for the account.
B61
If you enter the number of accounts(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of accounts to be accrued(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A64
Collateral management monitoring run.
B64
If you enter the collateral agreements(Coll agree), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of collateral agreements(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C64
Enter the number of loans processed during this peak period.
G64
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H64
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 41: SAP Questionnaire 061510

END TIME

Page 42: SAP Questionnaire 061510

END TIMENA0

END TIME

END TIME

END TIME

I42
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 43: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR Insurance

What time does the AVERAGE workday start 9:00What time does the AVERAGE workday end 18:00What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

OBJECTS Items ST TIME END TIMEACC-STAT-PEAK Invoice/Account statements per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0INS-INV-PEAK Insurance objects per PEAK TIME 0 NA NA NA 0 0

OBJECTS ST TIME END TIMEBROK-ITEM-PEAK Broker report items per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0PAY-EXE-PEAK payment plan executions per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0PAY-TRANS-PEAK Payment plan transfers per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0ACC-BAL-PEAK Account balance displays per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B7
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B18
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D18
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F18
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B22
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D22
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F22
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B31
If you enter the number of invoice/account statments(OBJECTS), you MUST enter Items and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of invoices and accounts statements (OBJECTS) processed and printed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C31
Enter the number of items(Items) per invoice/account statement(OBJECT). Not the total items.
G31
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H31
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A32
There are several different kinds of insurance objects. The principal objects used are contract accounts and claims. You can assign several insurance objects to a contract account.
B32
If you enter the number of insurance objects(OBJECTS), you MUST enter Items and ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of insurance objects(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
C32
Enter the number of items(Items) per insurance objects(OBJECT). Not the total items.
G32
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H32
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A35
This is the number of broker report items(reported premiums, claims, commission and cost items) reported by all brokers or intermediaries during the period.
B35
If you enter the number of broker report items(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of broker report items(OBJECTS) reported during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B36
If you enter the number of payment plan executions(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of payment plan executions(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. The number of open items is relevant for sizing.
G36
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H36
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B37
If you enter the number of payment plan transfers(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of payment plan transfers(OBJECTS) processed during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. The number of open items is relevant for sizing.
G37
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H37
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B38
If you enter the number of account balance displays(OBJECTS), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the highest number of account balance displays(OBJECTS) that occur during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G38
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H38
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 44: SAP Questionnaire 061510

OBJECTS Items MONTHSACC-STAT-AVERAGE Invoice/Account statements per YEAR 0 NA NA NA 0INS-INV-AVERAGE Insurance objects per YEAR 0 NA NA NA 0

OBJECTS MONTHSBROK-ITEM-AVERAGE Broker report items per year NA NA NA NA 0PAY-EXE-AVERAGE payment plan executions per year NA NA NA NA 0PAY-TRANS-AVERAGE Payment plan transfers per year NA NA NA NA 0

B41
If you enter the number of invoice/account statements(OBJECTS) you MUST also enter Items and MONTHS. These are the average number of invoice/account statements(OBJECTS) processed per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C41
Enter number of line items(Items) per invoice/account statement(OBJECTS) processed per year.
G41
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A42
There are several different kinds of insurance objects. The principal objects used are contract accounts and claims. You can assign several insurance objects to a contract account.
B42
If you enter the number of insurance objects(OBJECTS) you MUST also enter Items and MONTHS. These are the average number of insurance objects(OBJECTS) processed per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C42
Enter number of line items(Items) per insurance object(OBJECTS) processed per year.
G42
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
A45
This is the number of broker report items(reported premiums, claims, commission and cost items) reported by all brokers or intermediaries during the period.
B45
If you enter the number of broker report items(OBJECTS) you MUST also enter MONTHS. These are the average number of broker report items(OBJECTS) processed per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
G45
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B46
If you enter the number of payment plan executions(OBJECTS) you MUST also enter MONTHS. These are the average number of payment plan executions(OBJECTS) processed per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
G46
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B47
If you enter the number of payment plan transfers(OBJECTS) you MUST also enter MONTHS. These are the average number of payment plan transfers(OBJECTS) processed per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
G47
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
Page 45: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR Retail Forecasting and Replenishment

What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Loc Prod ST TIME END TIMER-MDS Master Data Synchronization-SCM->FRP PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0

OP Items Res time WMD ST TIME END TIMER-ODS Order Data Synchronization-SCM->FRP PEAK TIME 0 NA NA yes 0 0

Loc Prod SDT Loc Prod ST TIME END TIMER-PCSD Processing Consumption (and stock) data PEAK TIME yes 0 NA NA 0 0

Loc Prod OP Items ST TIME END TIMER-FRP--FRP run 0 0 NA NA NA 0 0

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B16
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D16
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F16
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B17
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D17
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F17
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B18
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D18
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F18
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B29
If you enter the number of location products(Loc Prod), you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME. These are the number of all location product combinations which are relevant for F&R, i.e. for which replenishment is performed with F&R You specify the time frame in which location products is executed.
G29
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H29
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B32
If you enter the number of order proposal items(OP Items) you MUST also enter Res time and start time and end time. These are the average number of order proposal items created by F&R per day.
C32
Enter the order proposal residence time in days for the order proposal items. This is usually the time between the creation of an order and the complete delivery.
F32
Choose yes if the R-ODS step is processed with the R-MDS step.
G32
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H32
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B35
If you enter the number of location products(Loc Prod) you MUST also enter start time and end time. These are the peak number of location products processed per peak time period.
C35
SDT--has stock data already been processed beforehand, i.e. outside the process steps considered for this sizing.
D35
Non entry field. This is the value of the location products field of the R-MDS entry.
G35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H35
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B38
Non entry field. This is the value of the location products field of the R-MDS entry.
C38
Non entry field. This is the value of the OP items field of the R-ODS entry.
G38
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H38
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 46: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 QUICKSIZER SIZING FOR Utilities

What time does the AVERAGE workday start 9:00What time does the AVERAGE workday end 18:00What time does the PEAK load start 12:00 What time does the PEAK load end 13:00

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA =prodThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Billcycle Budget Partial P-items C-items Lines Contracts Tax ContAcc MetersUTIL-01-AVERAGE billing documents per YEAR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BusPart Overdues Deposits Cust cont MONTHSUTIL-02-AVERAGE billing documents per YEAR 0 0 0 NA 0

BusPart Days for batch ST TIME END TIMEUTIL-BP-PEAK Batch processing per PEAK TIME 0 0 NA NA NA 0 0

OBJECTS ST TIME END TIMEOVERVIEW-AVERAGE use of "Customer Overview" transaction per YEAR NA NA NA NA NA NAOVERVIEW-PEAK use of "Customer Overview" transaction per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0CONTACT-AVERAGE Customer contacts per YEAR NA NA NA NA NA NACONTACT-PEAK Customer contacts per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0MOVE IN-AVERAGE customer move-ins per YEAR NA NA NA NA NA NAMOVE IN-PEAK customer move-ins per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0MOVE-OUT-AVERAGE customer move-outs per YEAR NA NA NA NA NA NAMOVE-OUT-PEAK customer move-outs per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 0 0

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B4
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B5
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B6
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B7
Enter a time between 00:00 and 24:00.
B18
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D18
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F18
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B19
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D19
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F19
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B20
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D20
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F20
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B21
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D21
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F21
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B22
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D22
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F22
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
A32
Master Data and Transactional Data for Disk Sizing-Part I.
B32
These are the number of bills sent to a customer each year. Typical values here are 1(yearly), 2(bi-yearly), 4(quarterly), 6(bi-monthly) 12(monthly. This is used to calculate disk.
C32
Enter the average number of budget bills per business partner per year. Budget bills are not posting relevant.
D32
Enter number of customer bills that are based on partial amounts not actual meter reading consumption. Partial bills are legally declared as earnings of the company.
E32
Enter the number of post relevant line items on each partial or budget bill. This should be the average of number of lines for each bill that contain monetary information that is passed to general ledger. If no partial or budget bill line items are passed to GL this should be 0.
F32
If C-items is entered then Contracts, ContAcc, Meters and MONTHS must be entered. Enter the number of post relevant line items on each consumption bill. This should be the average of the number of lines for each bill that contain monetary information that is passed to general ledger.
G32
Enter the number of additional information lines on each consumption bill. This might be a line for consumption or for control readings.
H32
If Contracts is entered C-items, Cont/Acc Meters and MONTHS must also be entered. Enter the number of contracts between the utility company and the business partner(customer). A single business partner might have a contract for electricity and a second contract for gas.
I32
Enter the number of different taxes to be paid on each contract.
J32
If ContAcc is entered then C-items, Contracts, Meters and MONTHS must also be entered. Enter the number of accounts in which posting data for contracts or contract items are processed for which the same collection/payment agreements apply.
K32
Enter the number of meters to be read. Meters in stock are not counted. However, a single meter with multiple registers should be counted as the number of registers.
A35
Master Data and Transactional Data for Disk Sizing-Part 2.
B35
If you enter the number of business partners(BusPart) you MUST also enter Overdues, Deposits, Cust Cont and MONTHS. These are the number of customers, organizations or groups in which the utility company has a business interest(OBJECTS) processed per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C35
Enter the number of overdue notices(Overdues) to be sent per year. This is usually between 5 and 10% of the total number of billing documents.
D35
Enter number of total number of cash security deposits(Deposits) which are accepted per year.
E35
Enter number of customer contacts (Cust cont) per year. If you customer contacts are completely handled in the CRM system, this should be 0.
G35
Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
B38
This is forced to be the same as BusPart in UTIL-02. If you enter the number of business partners(BusPart) you MUST also enter Overdues, Deposits, Cust Cont and MONTHS. These are the number of customers, organizations or groups in which the utility company has a business interest(OBJECTS) processed per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
C38
Enter the minimum number of days available for one complete billing cycle.
G38
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H38
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B41
These are the average number of use of the "Customer Overview" transaction per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
B42
If you enter OBJECTS you must enter ST TIME and END TIME. This is the number of use of the "Customer Overview" transaction during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G42
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H42
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B43
These are the average number of customer contacts per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row. If customer contacts are recorded in the CRM system, this should be 0.
B44
If you enter OBJECTS you must enter ST TIME and END TIME. This is the number of customer contacts during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements. If customer contacts are recorded in the CRM system, this should be 0.
G44
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H44
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B45
These are the average number of customer registraction for utility servers per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
B46
If you enter OBJECTS you must enter ST TIME and END TIME. This is the number of customer registration for utility service during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G46
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H46
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B47
These are the average number of cancellations of utility service per year. This is used to calculate disk and will be used to calculate CPU if you put nothing in the PEAK row.
B48
If you enter OBJECTS you must enter ST TIME and END TIME. This is the number of customer cancellation of utility service during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak OBJECTS are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G48
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H48
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
Page 47: SAP Questionnaire 061510

NONONO

MONTHS0

L32
If MONTHS is entered then C-items, Contracts, ContAcc and Meters must be entered. Enter the number of months this data will remain online before being archived.
Page 48: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 T-SHIRT SIZING FOR PLM

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA NoneThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Enter total CONCURRENT users during the PEAK hour--A user must NOT be counted twiceHe is either one type of user or another--NOT both at the same time during the PEAK hour

PLM Core 7.0 Click for sizing white paper

Users SAPS0 0

cPROJECTS SIZING Click for sizing white paper

Objects Projects Results

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B13
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D13
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F13
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B14
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D14
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F14
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B15
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D15
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F15
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B16
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D16
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F16
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B17
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D17
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F17
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
A28
Provides a Web User Interface (Web UI) to manage the master data objects for PLM. It requires a search engine and a portal engine which must be sized separately. It also continues to need the base PLM applications below.
B28
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
B31
Enter the number of concurrent users expected.
B33
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
Page 49: SAP Questionnaire 061510

CPU sizing based on number of objects and number of projects 0 SAPSDisk sizing based on number of objects and number of projects 0 GB's

cFOLDERS SIZING

# msgs msg size SAPSCPU sizing for the download scenario 0CPU sizing for the upload and copying scenario 0

# docs doc size GB'sDisk sizing based on number of documents and size of document 0

cRECORDS SIZING Click for sizing white paperUser Based Sizing

LOW MEDIUM HIGH SAPSUsers in Records and Case Management-PEAK PER HOUR 0

Thruput Based SizingCASES ST TIME END TIME

PEAK Cases created by a user per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 12 13

Elements ST TIME END TIMETOTAL elements added to cases by a user per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 12 13

CASES ST TIME END TIMEPEAK Cases created by an interface per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 12 13

Elements ST TIME END TIMETOTAL elements added to cases by an interface per PEAK TIME NA NA NA NA 12 13

# cases # elements GB'sDisk sizing based on cases and records 0

CONTENT SERVER SIZING Click for sizing white paperUser Based Sizing

B36
Enter the average number of objects per project. This is the sum of all phases, checklists, checklist items, tasks, and subtasks in each project. Choose the number which most closely represents your estimated requirements.
C36
Enter the number of projects you plan to have per year.
B37
Enter the average number of objects per project. This is the sum of all phases, checklists, checklist items, tasks, and subtasks in each project. Choose the number which most closely represents your estimated requirements.
C37
Enter the number of projects you plan to have per year.
A39
This is based on the SAP White paper dated September 2008.
B42
Enter the maximum number of downloads per hour that you expect to occur during the peak hour.
C42
Enter the average size for each of the download messages.
B43
Enter the maximum number of uploads plus copys that you expect to occur during the peak hour.
C43
Enter the average size for each of the upload and copy messages.
B46
Enter the number of documents you plan to store in your PLM database.
C46
Enter the average size of these documents in MB's.
B48
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
B50
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour
C50
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour
D50
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour.
A51
This is based on SAP white paper dated March 2004.
A55
To reflect the creation of a case or a record (empty without any elements) by a user, enter the number of records created by users per the peak time period.
B55
If you enter the number of CASES you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of empty cases or records created by a user per peak time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak CASES are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G55
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H55
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A58
To reflect the creation of a case or a record (empty without any elements) by a user, enter the number of records created by users per the peak time period.
B58
If you enter the number of CASES you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the total number of elements, such as a document to a case or a record created by a user per peak time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak CASES are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G58
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H58
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A61
To reflect the creation of a case or a record (empty without any elements) by a API (BAPI) call, enter the number of records created by users per the peak time period.
B61
If you enter the number of CASES you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the number of empty cases or records created by a API (BAPI) call per peak time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak CASES are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H61
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
A64
To reflect the creation of a case or a record (empty without any elements) by a API (BAPI) call, enter the number of records created by users per the peak time period.
B64
If you enter the number of CASES you MUST enter ST TIME and END TIME but NOT MONTHS. These are the total number of elements, such as a document to a case or a record created by a API (BAPI) call per peak time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. You specify the time period that these peak CASES are processed using the ST TIME and END TIME columns. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
G64
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will start processing. Default for this is the overall Peak Start Time.
H64
Enter the time of day that the peak of these OBJECTS will end processing. Default for this is the overall Peak End Time.
B67
Enter the number of cases or records you expect to store in your PLM database.
C67
Enter the average number of elements in each case.
A69
This guidance is based on the SAP whitepaper dated June 2006.
B69
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
Page 50: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Users SAPS GB'sPEAK PARALLEL Users accessing the Content database 0 0

A72
Because documents are changed on the user's PC, CPU power has not been a bottleneck so far. Enter the number of concurrent parallel users who access the database at the same time. Parallel users are much lower than concurrent users because parallel users may be working on a document in their PC which requires no file server workload. They will only access the database when they request a document or replace a document.
Page 51: SAP Questionnaire 061510

SAPS0

SAPS0

SAPS0

SAPS0

Page 52: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 T-SHIRT SIZING FOR MDM-7.1

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA NoneThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Enter total CONCURRENT users during the PEAK hour--A user must NOT be counted twice

NetWeaver MDM Server-APP Server Click for sizing white paperRepository # Records # Users Results

CPU sizing--number of records in the primary table SAPSMemory sizing GB'sAccelerator size on disk GB's

NetWeaver MDM Server-DBMS ServerResults

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B13
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D13
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F13
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B14
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D14
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F14
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B15
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D15
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F15
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B16
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D16
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F16
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B17
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D17
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F17
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
A28
MDM Server--Mandatory--Manages access through the DBMS to one or more MDM repositories containing master data. The MDM Server passes this information to various client components across a network. These repositories may be unique to your implementation or you may used predefined MDM Business Content repositories. Material(for ERP), Vendor(for ERP), Customer(for ERP), Employee(for ERP), Article(for SAP Retail), Product/Material(for CRM/SRM, ERP), Business Partner/Vendor/Customer(for CRM/SRM,ERP)
B28
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
B30
Enter the type of repository BP Std=12 tables, 39 total fields & 11 lookup fields in primary table and 32 total fiels in sub tables. BP Ext=39 tables, 79 total fields & 23 lookup fields in primary table and 158 total fiels in sub tables. SRM Cat=19 tables, 29 total fields & 16 lookup fields in primary table and 54 total fiels in sub tables.
C30
Enter the number of records in the primary table in the repository.
D30
Enter the number of concurrent peak users.
Page 53: SAP Questionnaire 061510

CPU sizing 0 SAPSMemory sizing Data size 0 GB'sDisk sizing--based on estimate of total storage 0 GB's

Import, Syndication,Layout Server-Optional ResultsCPU sizing 0 SAPSMemory sizing 0 GB's

E36
1600 SAPs is recommended
E37
1600 SAPs is recommended
A38
This should be used for disk sizing since it allows you to actually specify the amount of storage you need.
B38
Enter the total size of all stored data and objects (PDF's, JPG's, etc.)
A40
Import Server-- Optional--Allows you to import data automatically in conjunction with predefined inbound ports and import maps. Syndication Server--Optional--Allows you to export data automatically in conjunction with predefined outbound ports and syndicator maps. Layout Server--Optional--Supports the publishing capabilities of MDM.
E41
1600 SAPs is recommended
E42
1600 SAPs is recommended
Page 54: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 T-SHIRT SIZING FOR Miscellaneous Applications

NON-PRODUCTION SYSTEMSSystem Landscape (required)

defined, you may then create an implementation strategy for the setup and maintenance of the systems and clients within this landscape.

system, a quality assurance system and a production system. This configuration ensures the proper management and testing of changes to the system before applying them to the live production environment. If nothing is specified we will assume a Dev and Test system.

Type Default Size Storage DefaultFirst non-production system Dev 100GB'sSecond non-production system QA NoneThird non-production system, if needed None NoneFourth non-production system, if needed None NoneFifth non-production system, if needed None None

Please specify any other additional information to help in sizing

Enter total CONCURRENT users during the PEAK hour--A user must NOT be counted twiceHe is either one type of user or another--NOT both at the same time during the PEAK hour

Business Obj Planning & Consolidation(BPC 7.5)SQL/OLAP Server IIS/.NET Server

System SAPS GB Memory cores GB Memory StorageServer--PEAK users-MS Windows version 200 min

Netweaver Tier IIS/.NET ServerUsers SAPS GB Memory cores GB Memory Storage

Server--PEAK users-NW version-simple requirements See BWServer--PEAK users-NW version-Med Complexity requirements See BWServer--PEAK users-NW version-Very Complex requirements See BW

A system landscape consists of the systems and clients that are needed for non-production. Once the system landscape has been

IBM and SAP strongly recommend having at least a three-system landscape. A three-system landscape is comprised of a development

B13
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D13
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F13
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B14
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D14
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F14
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B15
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D15
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F15
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B16
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D16
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F16
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
B17
This is used to specify the type or name of this non-production system. Please choose one of the specific types of systems or specify "other" and put the name of the "other" system in the comments box below.
D17
You may specify the size of this system using either expected number of concurrent peak users of this system or as a percentage of the size of production of this system. The next cell is used to specify whether you are using users or percentage.
F17
Specify the raw storage in GB's (before uplift for RAID, utilization, Unicode, growth, etc) for this non-production system.
A31
Windows version uses SQL as the BPC storage repository and IIS/.NET as the application layer.
B31
SMALL = Up to 100 named/20concurrent users doing simple calculations, lightweight consolidations, simple input, light default logic, and limited MDX based formulas. Midsize =Up to 500 named/100concurrent users doing simple calculations, lightweight consolidations, simple input, light default logic, and limited MDX based formulas. LARGE = Up to 100 named/200concurrent users doing simple calculations, lightweight consolidations, simple input, light default logic, and limited MDX based formulas.
A34
Netweaver version uses SAP BW as the BPC storage repository, Netweaver as the application layer and IIS/.NET as an additional application layer. This is for simple calculations, simple input, light default logic and limited MDX based formulas.
B34
Enter the number of users.
I34
Since BPC storage is on BW, the storage for BPC can be approximated by using the BW QuickSizer.
A35
Netweaver version uses SAP BW as the BPC storage repository, Netweaver as the application layer and IIS/.NET as an additional application layer. This is for medium complexity calculations, default logic, limited MDX based formulas, light consolidation operations and medium complexity planning logic.
B35
Enter the number of users.
I35
IBM_USER:Since BPC storage is on BW, the storage for BPC can be approximated by using the BW QuickSizer.
A36
Netweaver version uses SAP BW as the BPC storage repository, Netweaver as the application layer and IIS/.NET as an additional application layer. This is for complex calculations, very detailed default logic, limited MDX based formulas and complex planning logic.
B36
Enter the number of users.
I36
Since BPC storage is on BW, the storage for BPC can be approximated by using the BW QuickSizer.
Page 55: SAP Questionnaire 061510

OutlookSoft sizing Guidance Click for vendor informationUsers Results

Server sizing--number of PEAK users

Enterprise Search Appliance sizing Guidance# Files # Bus Obj Users SAPS # Blades GB's Mem

Server sizing--number of PEAK users 0 0 0

Adobe Document Services sizing Guidance Click for sizing white paperSmall Medium Large SAPS

ADS Server--# documents per hour 0ADS Server--# documents per hour(batching) 0

SM Simple SM Complex Medium Large SAPSADS Server--# documents per hour(interactive) 0ADS Server--Will ADS PDF cache be enabled? NoADS Server--Will changes or printing be permitted? NoADS Server--Will all form signatures be extracted? NoADS Server--Will the form data be extracted after 2nd signature? No

Learning Solutions sizing GuidanceUsers Activity Level Course Size SAPS

User based sizing guidance for Learning Solutions 0

GRC-VIRSA sizing Guidance--Initial t-shirt sizing Click for sizing white paperSystem SAPS GB-Storage

Compliance Calibrator(Risk analysis and remediation) NA NA 0 0Access Enforcer(Compliant user provisioning) NA NA 0 0Role Expert(Enterprise role management) NA NA 0 0TOTAL 0 0

GRC-VIRSA sizing Guidance--Expert sizing Click for sizing white paperUsers Roles SOD Report SAPS GB-Storage

Compliance Calibrator(Risk analysis and remediation) NA 0 Initial Load Sizing per hour 0 NA Daily Transactional Sizing per hour 0 NA Daily Batch Sizing per hour 0 NA

Access Enforcer(Compliant user provisioning) NA 0

B39
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
B41
Enter the number of concurrent users active on the system at the same time during the peak hour.
A45
This guidance is based on the SAP white paper dated November 2008 .
B47
Enter the number of files exclusive of business objects processed on the system at the same time during the peak hour.
C47
Enter the number of business objects exclusive of files processed on the system at the same time during the peak hour.
D47
Enter the number of concurrent user sessions active on the system at the same time during the peak hour.
A49
Adobe document services render PDF, PCL, PostScript and other output formats from form designs created using the Adobe LiveCycle Designer. SAP recommends adding 10% to the total SAPS as a security measure. This version of the t-shirt sizing is based on 2004s. Since it runs in NetWeaver, it is supported on all NetWeaver platforms. This guidance is based on the SAP whitepaper dated 2006.
B49
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
A51
In this scenario, the ADS server is asked to render and print documents in a random mode.
B51
Enter the number of small documents printed. A small document is equivalent to 1 page of average amount of data.
C51
Enter the number of medium documents printed. A small document is equivalent to 10 pages of average amount of data.
D51
Enter the number of large documents printed. A small document is equivalent to 100 pages of average amount of data.
A52
In this scenario, the ADS server is asked to render and print documents where the documents are accumulated and presented in a homogeneous batch of 50 documents.
B52
Enter the number of small documents printed. A small document is equivalent to 1 page of average amount of data.
C52
Enter the number of medium documents printed. A small document is equivalent to 2 pages of average amount of data.
D52
Enter the number of large documents printed. A small document is equivalent to 4 pages of average amount of data.
A54
Enter the number of documents per hour in each of the document size categories.
B54
Enter the number of small simple interactive forms processed. A small simple form type is 1 page with mostly static form elements.
C54
Enter the number of small complex interactive forms processed. A small complex form type is 1 page with some interactive form elements.
D54
Enter the number of medium interactive forms processed. A medium form type is 2 pages with some interactive form elements.
E54
Enter the number of large interactive forms processed. A large form type is 4 pages with some interactive form elements.
A55
Form Generation--During the form processing workflow, you may ask ADS to cache the form. This allows for better performance and response time. Default is No. This is test A and B.
A56
Application of Security Settings--During the form review process specify whether changes or printing will be permitted. Default is No. This is test C.
A57
Digital Signatures--When ADS receives a signed form, a list of signatures is typically retrieved and each signature is validated to ensure the form is in good standing. Default is No. This is test D.
A58
Digital Signatures--After the form's standing is established, a request is send to ADS to retrieve the form state when a given signature was applied. This is done to compare certain values of the form for validity and authentication. Normally this is done after the 2nd signature. Default is No. This is test E.
A60
This guidance is based on the SAP whitepaper dated 2004.
B62
Enter the number of users per hour. This is not the number of courses which are requested per hour. If the duration for executing a course is expected to be a half an hour, the number of concurrent users is half the number of requested courses per hour.
C62
Enter the average activity level of these users. A slow user is characterized as doing about 30 steps per hour. Medium about 60 steps per hour. Fast about 120 steps per hour.
D62
Enter the average course size. A small course is characterized as consisting of about 20 steps. Medium is about 50 steps. Big is about 100 steps.
A64
Using T-shirt model for GRC Access Controls, customers can size the necessary products accordingly. This method is not as accurate as transactional sizing but gives you a rough estimate before you are able to do a more in-depth approach. Make sure that this is done for the peak hour of the year. All the components reside on SAP NetWeaver. Pre-requisites include J2EE and IGS. This guidance is based on the SAP whitepaper dated October 2007.
B64
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
B66
SMALL = Up to 10,000 named users, 5000 roles and 10,000 violations per hour. MEDIUM = Up to 25,000 named users, 10,000 roles and 50,000 violations per hour. LARGE = Up to 50,000 named users, 25,000 roles and 100,000 violations per hour.
B67
SMALL - Up to 5000 roles and 10 requests per hour MEDIUM = Up to 10000 roles and 25 requests per hour LARGE = Up to 25000 roles and 50 requests per hour
B68
SMALL - Up to 100 simple roles, 200 derived roles and 500 roles in mass generation per hour MEDIUM = Up to 250 simple roles, 500 derived roles and 1000 roles in mass generation per hour LARGE = Up to 500 simple roles, 1000 derived roles and 2500 roles in mass generation per hour
A71
Using expert sizing requires more product knowledge. The sizing approach for GRC Access Control includes the most popular scenarios needed for sizing of all the three components. Make sure that this is done for the peak hour of the year. All the components reside on SAP NetWeaver. Pre-requisites include J2EE and IGS. This guidance is based on the SAP whitepaper dated October 2007.
B71
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
B73
Enter the approximate number of total named SAP Users (User Sync)
C73
Enter the approximate number of total Roles (Role Sync)
D73
Enter the approximate number of SoD (segregation of duties) Violations during risk analysis.
E73
Will you be processing management reports?
Page 56: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Initial Load Sizing per hour 0 NA Daily Transactional Sizing per hour 0 NA

Role Expert(Enterprise role management) NA 0 Daily Transactional Sizing per hour 0 NA Daily Batch Sizing per hour 0 NATotal 0 NA

EH&S-Environment, Health and Safety--Initial t-shirt sizing Click for sizing white paperSystem SAPS GB-Storage

Product Safety(PS) and dangerous goods(DG) sizing NA NA 0 0LOW MEDIUM HIGH

Number of users--All other sub modules--PEAK PER HOUR 0

xEM-Emissions Management--sizing guidanceUSERS SAPS GB-Storage

Compliance Management--Users-PEAK PER HOUR NA NA 0 0Calculations

Emissions Management--Calculations per year--Average per year NA NA NA 0Emissions Management--Calculations per hour--PEAK PER HOUR NA NA 0 NA

xRPM-Resource & Portfolio Mgmt--sizing guidanceDISPLAYS Items per EP SAPS RPM SAPS

User Displays-PEAK PER HOUR-JAVA based dashboard 0 0User Displays-PEAK PER HOUR-ABAP based dashboard 0 0

ARIS BPM--Server sizing guidance Click for vendor informationBusiness Server DBMS Server

USERS SAPS GB-Memory SAPS GB-MemoryConcurrent users on the server--PEAK PER HOUR 0 0 0 0

SAP MOBILITY--three alternatives

SAP MOBILITY--CRM LOGONS SAPS GB-StorageUsers that will be synchronizing laptops-PEAK PER HOUR 0 0

SAP MOBILITY--Mobile BusinessWeb Application Server ECC Server

Syncs J2EE ABAP DB ABAPMobile Asset Management(MAM) Standard and Utilities 0 0 0 0

A87
Using T-shirt model, customers can size the necessary products accordingly. This method is not as accurate as transactional sizing but gives you a rough estimate before you are able to do a more in-depth approach. Make sure that this is done for the peak hour of the year. This guidance is based on the SAP whitepaper dated 2006.
C87
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
A89
EH&S is dominated by product safety and dangerous goods concerning system load. Other sub modules are estimated in the next line. It is assumed that this workload occurs fairly evenly throughout the year.
B89
SMALL = Up to 5,000 listed substances, 10,000 real substances, 20,000 MSDS, 50,000 TREM Cards, 10 languages/countries and 250,000 shipped reports/year. MEDIUM = Up to 10,000 listed substances, 50,000 real substances, 100,000 MSDS, 500,000 TREM Cards, 30 languages/countries and 500,000 shipped reports/year. LARGE = Up to 20,000 listed substances, 100,000 real substances, 500,000 MSDS, 2,000,000 TREM Cards, 30 languages/countries and 2,000,000 shipped reports/year. Extra-LARGE = Greater than 20,000 listed substances, 100,000 real substances, 500,000 MSDS, 2,000,000 TREM Cards, 30 languages/countries and 2,000,000 shipped reports/year.
B90
Low users change screens every 6 minutes during the peak hour
C90
Medium users change screens every 30 seconds during the peak hour
D90
High users change screens every 10 seconds during the peak hour.
A91
Enter the number of users of sub modules other than PS and DG. These include EH&S modules such as IH, OH, WA, etc
A93
xEM is a compliance and emissions management application to ensure and prove regulatory compliance. xEM integrates with core ECC. Using T-shirt model, customers can size the necessary products accordingly. This method is not as accurate as transactional sizing but gives you a rough estimate before you are able to do a more in-depth approach. Make sure that this is done for the peak hour of the year. This guidance is based on the SAP whitepaper dated September 2006.
B95
Enter the total number of concurrent users doing compliance tracking. This is for the peak hour of the year.
B97
Enter the number of calculations processed for the entire year. This assumes that each record requires 4kB and that each calculation has an average of 5 emission records. If you have 1000 daily records and 500 monthly records and 100 annual records, you would put (1000*365 + 500*12 + 100) 371100.
B98
Enter the maximum number of calculations processed during the peak hour. If you have 100 daily, 10 monthy and 5000 annual calculations that will be processed in the peak hour you would enter 5110.
A100
xRPM unifies project management, time tracking, financial data, and employee skills information in a portfolio management and governance mode. Make sure that this is done for the peak hour of the year. This guidance is based on the SAP whitepaper dated February 2008.
B102
Enter the total number of concurrent xRPM dashboard displays per peak hour. This can be estimated by multiplying the total number of peak concurrent users by the average number of displays per user during the peak hour.
C102
Enter the number of portfolio items per largest portfolio.
D102
These are the estimated SAPS for the Portal part of xRPM workload.
E102
These are the estimated SAPS for the Core RPM JAVA server.
B103
Enter the total number of concurrent xRPM dashboard displays per peak hour. This can be estimated by multiplying the total number of peak concurrent users by the average number of displays per user during the peak hour.
C103
Enter the number of portfolio items per largest portfolio.
D103
These are the estimated SAPS for the Portal part of xRPM workload.
E103
These are the estimated SAPS for the Core RPM ABAP server.
A105
ARIS is a Business Process Management suite of products. It includes functions such asarchitect, optimizer, publisher, simulator, rules designer and balanced scorecard. It is fully integrated with SAP Netweaver and SAP Solution Manager for business functions as well as SAP software installation and upgrade processes. It requires a single Business server with a DBMS. The Oracle or SQL Server DBMS can be on a separate server. Make sure that this is done for the peak hour of the year. This guidance is based on the ARIS whitepaper dated October 2006.
B105
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
C106
This is a Wintel platform only. The DBMS may run in this server as well but is not recommended for more than 50 users.
E106
This is the DBMS server. It may be included in the Business Server for fewer than 50 users. This server is any platform on which MS SQL or Oracle is support.
B108
Enter the total number of concurrent users with access to the Business Server. This is for the peak hour of the year.
A110
There are currently three Mobility sizing alternatives 1. Sizing for synchronizing laptops--Use the QuickSizer for CRM Mobility 2. Sizing for Mobile Business using non-laptop handheld pre-built applications 3. Sizing for NetWeaver Mobile using application development tools for hand-held devices
A112
This is the same sizing as asked in the CRM QuickSizer for mobility.
D113
Enter maximum # of logons per hour for synchronizing laptops only.
A115
This is based on an SAP white paper dated September August 2008
A118
MAM is a full offline mobile application that helps field service and maintenance technicians perform their daily activities at their customer sites. This sizes the backend server functions and not the client requirements. See the white paper for details on the specifics of the scenario sized.
B118
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
Page 57: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Mobile Asset Management for Utilities(MAU) 0 0 NA 0Syncs CRM SAPS

Mobile Sales for Handheld with CRM 5.x 0Web Application Server ECC Server

Visits To Handheld To Backend DB ABAPMobile Direct Store Delivery 0 0 NA 0

Web Application Server ECC ServerSyncs J2EE ABAP DB ABAP

Mobile Sales for Handheld with R/3 and ECC 0 0 NA 0Mobile Time Sheet-single mode scenario-sync weekly NA 0 NA 0Mobile Time Sheet-administration scenario-sync daily NA 0 NA 0Mobile Travel Expenses-Daily Trip Scenario NA 0 NA 0Mobile Travel Expenses-Weekly Trip Scenario NA 0 NA 0Smart Sync Data Model NA 0 0 NA

SAP MOBILITY--NetWeaver MobilityWeb Application Server ECC Server

Profile J2EE ABAP DB ABAPBack-end triggered delta load NA 0 NA NA

Web Application Server ECC ServerSyncs J2EE ABAP DB ABAP

Client Synchronizations NA 0 NA NA

Web Application Server ECC ServerMessages J2EE ABAP DB ABAP

Processing uploaded messages in an 8-hour window NA 0 NA NA

SAP NFe-electronic invoicing-Biller Direct Click for sizing white paperBC's J2EE AS DB

Using FI-AR(accounts receivable) as the backend 0 0 0Using FI-CA(contract accounts) as the backend 0 0 0

NRX-Add-on to EP Click for vendor informationUSERS Think time Java iViews URL iViews % KMC

NW-EP-PRT-PEAK 180 4 0 30

DuetUsers Duet Server Duet Memory

A119
MAU integrates the mobile proceses with SAP for Utilities and Enterprise Asset Management. It is based on MAM. See the white paper for details on the specifics of the scenario sized.
B119
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
A121
Mobile Sales for Handheld is one of a number of applications, such as Direct Store Delivery, Mobile Service for Handheld, Mobile Procurement or Time and Travel which allows the sales representative to carry out their daily work in offline mode. See the white paper for details on the specifics of the scenario sized.
B121
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year. Mid-size data sets assumed.
C121
These are the number of SAPS that are to be added to the CRM server.
A124
DSD addresses the needs of drivers and van sellers in direct-store-delivery situations. The sizing assumes 1000 synchronizations per hour. See the white paper for specifics on the sizing scenarios.
B124
Enter the total number of customers/visits per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
A127
See the white paper for specifics on the sizing scenarios.
B127
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
A128
See the white paper for specifics on the sizing scenarios.
B128
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
A129
See the white paper for specifics on the sizing scenarios.
B129
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
A130
See the white paper for specifics on the sizing scenarios.
B130
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
A131
See the white paper for specifics on the sizing scenarios.
B131
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
A132
See the white paper for specifics on the sizing scenarios. This is based on measurement for MI 7.0 SPS05.
B132
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
A134
This allows you to develop mobile applications that can be deployed on mobile devices. This sizes the backend server functions and not the client requirements. See the white paper for details on the specifics of the scenario sized. This is based on an SAP white paper dated July 2008.
B137
Enter the appropriate profile: Small = Up to 10000 data objects per hour and up to 94000 DB rows per hour. Medium = Up to 50000 data objects per hour and up to 470000 DB rows per hour. Medium = Up to 100000 data objects per hour and up to 940000 DB rows per hour.
B141
Enter the total number of synchronizations per hour expected during the peak hour of the year.
B145
Enter the total number of uploaded messages that are processed during an eight hour processing window during the peak time of the year.
A147
This allows you to electronically send bills to their customers and share account information with them. See the white paper for details on the specifics of the scenario sized. This is based on an SAP white paper dated August 2005.
B147
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
B149
Enter the peak number of business cases per hour based on FI-AR as the ECC backend. This is the peak per hour. A business case is a typical scenario of an electronic payment process. The benchmark scenario consists of logging on, displaying three bills, paying one of the bills, displaying the payment status, backing out the payment of this bill, displaying the status, displaying the status of the last 12 months of bills paid and then logs off. Please see the white paper for a complete description of the business case.
B150
Enter the peak number of business cases per hour based on FI-CA as the ECC backend. This is the peak per hour. A business case is a typical scenario of an electronic payment process. The benchmark scenario consists of logging on, displaying three bills, paying one of the bills, displaying the payment status, backing out the payment of this bill, displaying the status, displaying the status of the last 12 months of bills paid and then logs off. Please see the white paper for a complete description of the business case.
A153
NRX is a master data management add-on to SAP. It is made of the Asset Center which has minimal impact on sizing the SAP server and VIP. VIP is sized as an EP application. Use the Custom line of EP in the QuickSizer. Recommended defaults are Number of concurrent users are commonly 10% of the total user population. 180 seconds is a reasonable think time. 6 Java iViews is a reasonable workload 30% KMC is reasonable. As this is an EP application, the resulting SAPS should be added to the EP footprint.
B153
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
A155
These users are simply using the portal to launch transactions in the back-end system. Portal pages typically contain a single URL iView (no Java iViews). This is an example of a custom portal application and as such can be described per your specific application requirements.
B155
If you enter USERS you must also enter Think time and either Java iViews or URL iViews or both. Enter the maximum number of concurrent VIP users during the peak hour. This is used to size CPU.
C155
Enter the elapsed time between two successive "clicks" of a user to the portal system. Default for VIP is 180 seconds.
D155
Enter the number of Java iViews of a typical VIP page for this scenario. A Java iView retrieves business content from back-end systems via Jco/RFC and renders the unformatted business content in HTML. Default for VIP is 4 .
E155
Enter the number of URL iViews of a typical VIP portal page for this scenario. For a URL iView, the portal generates the URL and sends it to the browser. The browser then sends the URL to the back-end system and retrieves the HTML content. Default for this scenario is 0.
F155
Enter the percentage of "clicks" access Knowledge Management Content. Default for this scenario is 30.
A158
Duet software presents selected business practices and information such as time management and budget monitoring, from SAP through MS Office. It is comprised of the Duet Client(Wintel only desktop add-on to MS Office), the Duet Server(.Net Wintel only Java server) and the NetWeaver add-on(Any Netweaver Java platform). It is assumed that this Duet infrastructure will access an already in place SAP Netweaver set of components. This sizing is based on the SAP White Paper dated December 2008.
Page 58: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Time Management-Users on Duet Server--PEAK PER HOUR 0 0.0Team Management-Users on Duet Server--PEAK PER HOUR 0 0.0Reporting-Users on Duet Server--PEAK PER HOUR 0 0.0Sales Management-Users on Duet Server--PEAK PER HOUR 0 0.0Sales Management-Users on Duet Server--PEAK PER HOUR 0 0.0

T-SHIRT SIZING GUIDANCE FOR KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT AND COLLABORATION Click for sizing white paperPORTAL DB Portal

Users SAPS SAPS MemoryKM-PEAK Concurrent users per PEAK TIME NA NA NA 0 0 0

NWDI or JDI Click for sizing SAP NOTE 737368Developers SAPS GB-Memory

Scenario 1-Development in a team 0 0Scenario 2-Development with components 0 0Scenario 2+-Development with a Track 0 0Scenario 3-Layered development 0 0

Web Dispatcher Click for sizing white paperMessages SAPS

Scenario 1-Incoming=HTTP,Outgoing=HTTP 0Scenario 2-Incoming=HTTPS,Outgoing=HTTPS-SSL passthrough 0Scenario 3-Incoming=HTTPS,Outgoing=HTTPS-SSL termination 0Scenario 4-Incoming=HTTPS,Outgoing=HTTPS-SSL re-encryption 0TOTAL 0

Auto-ID Infrastructure-RFID Click for sizing white paperSlap & Ship Scenario Print Req Tags Time SAPS StorageTag Commissioning 0 0.00

Pallets Cases TimePacking 0 0.00

Pallets Cases TimeLoading 0 0.00

RFID-Enabled Returnable Transport Item-RTI Scenario Print Req Tags Time SAPS StorageTag Commissioning in All 0 0.00

Pallets Cases Time

B160
Enter the total number of concurrent active sales management users during the peak hour of the year.
C160
These are the incremental SAPS for the Duet Server.
D160
GB's of memory recommended for the Duet Server. It is estimated from the number of J2EE nodes required at 3 GB's per node.
B161
Enter the total number of concurrent active sales management users during the peak hour of the year.
C161
These are the incremental SAPS for the Duet Server.
D161
GB's of memory recommended for the Duet Server. It is estimated from the number of J2EE nodes required at 3 GB's per node.
B162
Enter the total number of concurrent active sales management users during the peak hour of the year.
C162
These are the incremental SAPS for the Duet Server.
D162
GB's of memory recommended for the Duet Server. It is estimated from the number of J2EE nodes required at 3 GB's per node.
B163
Enter the total number of concurrent active sales management users during the peak hour of the year.
C163
These are the incremental SAPS for the Duet Server.
D163
GB's of memory recommended for the Duet Server. It is estimated from the number of J2EE nodes required at 3 GB's per node.
B164
Enter the total number of concurrent active users for all other Duet applications during the peak hour of the year.
C164
These are the incremental SAPS for the Duet Server.
D164
GB's of memory recommended for the Duet Server. It is estimated from the number of J2EE nodes required at 3 GB's per node.
G167
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
A170
KM provides a central, role-specific point of entry to unstructured information from various data sources such as text, presentations or HTML files. This information is available thru file servers, intranets or Internets. Access is provided thru the portal. This data may be managed thru SAP Content Server, other content management solutions as well as thru KM facilities. KM uses the search capabilities of TREX. For storage; in addition to the space needed for all content, add 4 kB's for each document stored in KM facilities plus 1MB for each virtual room.
B170
Enter the number of concurrent users (30 seconds average think time) accessing the KM functions during the peak or highest time period; usually an hour or a couple of hours. This is used to calculate CPU requirements.
A173
The NWDI or JDI consists of the following components: DTR-Design Time Repository CBS-Component Build Service CMS-Change Management Service All three are always installed together on NetWeaver but they can be used separately and distributed depending on the scenario and the workload.
B173
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a SAP NOTE. Access to this NOTE requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
A175
Only the Design Time Repository(DTR), which is installed on a J2EE server, is used. For testing with 1-5 developers recommend 500-1500 SAPS and 1 GB of memory.
B175
Enter the total number of concurrent active developers during the peak hour of the year.
C175
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
D175
This is the recommended amount of memory for the production server.
A176
This is the same as Scenario 1 except you may optionally use the SLD. SLD may already be present in your landscape or may be added to the DTR server. For testing with 1-5 developers recommend 500-1500 SAPS and 1 GB of memory.
B176
Enter the total number of concurrent active developers during the peak hour of the year.
C176
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
D176
This is the recommended amount of memory for the production server.
A177
All JDI components and the SLD are required. For testing with 1-5 developers, all JDI and the SLD are installed on a J2EE server. Recommended to be 500-1500 SAPS and 2 GB's of memory. See SAP Note 737368 for more architecture recommendations.
B177
Enter the total number of concurrent active developers during the peak hour of the year.
C177
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
D177
This is the recommended amount of memory for the production server.
A178
This is the same as scenario 2+ but requires distribution because of workload or performance problems. CBS should be transferred to a separate server.
B178
Enter the size of system: small=Up to 50 developers and up to 10,000 development components(DCs) medium=50-150 developers and 10,000-40,000 development components(DCs) large=More than 150 developers and more than 40,000 development components(DCs)
C178
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
D178
This is the recommended amount of memory for the production server.
B181
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
A183
Incoming protocol is HTTP and outgoing protocol is HTTP.
B183
Enter the total number of messages per second during the peak hour of the year. Assumed message size is 16 KB.
C183
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
A184
Incoming protocol is HTTPS and outgoing protocol is HTTPS-Pass through of end-to-end SSL.
B184
Enter the total number of messages per second during the peak hour of the year. Assumed message size is 16 KB.
C184
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
A185
Incoming protocol is HTTPS and outgoing protocol is HTTPS-SSL termination.
B185
Enter the total number of messages per second during the peak hour of the year. Assumed message size is 16 KB.
C185
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
A186
Incoming protocol is HTTPS and outgoing protocol is HTTPS-SSL termination and re-encryption.
B186
Enter the total number of messages per second during the peak hour of the year. Assumed message size is 16 KB.
C186
This is the estimated number of SAPS or capacity requirement.
A190
Auto-ID Infrastructure(All 4.0) is the SAP software component for RFID integration. There is a scenario for standalone shipping of goods, a second scenario for registering returns of goods and a third scenario for a completely integrated RFID solution into ERP.
B190
Sizing for this component or feature is provided by SAP thru the publication of a white paper. Access to this white paper requires an OSS User ID and SAP customer number which you can get from your local SAP representative.
A191
This is the standalone system for creating labels, print records and tags for shipping goods. There are three main functions; tag commissioning, Packing and Loading. Each step in Slap & Ship prepares some records for BI which are uploaded in batch.
A192
Warehouse worker requests and prints labels for labeling cases.
B192
Enter the number of print requests per peak time period for labels. Do not divide by 1000.
C192
Enter the number of RFID labels per print request during this peak time period.
D192
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
A194
All receives all EPC information for one packed pallet
B194
Enter the number of packed pallets processed per peak time period. Do not divide by 1000.
C194
Enter the number of cases per pallet during this peak time period.
D194
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
A196
Pallets leave the warehouse and goods issue is registered.
B196
Enter the number of loaded pallets per peak time period. Do not divide by 1000.
C196
Enter the number of cases per pallet during this peak time period.
D196
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
A198
This is the system for creating labels, print records and tags for shipping goods. There are three main functions; tag commissioning, Packing/Unpacking and Loading/Unloading. Each step in RTI prepares some records for BI which are uploaded in batch. This group is for the sizing for the All system.
A199
Warehouse worker requests and prints labels for labeling cases. This information is replicated to SCM.
B199
Enter the number of print requests per peak time period for labels. Do not divide by 1000.
C199
Enter the number of RFID labels per print request during this peak time period.
D199
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
Page 59: SAP Questionnaire 061510

Packing/Unpacking in All 0 0.00Pallets Cases Time

Loading/Unloading in All 0 0.00

RFID-Enabled Returnable Transport Item-RTI Scenario Print Req Tags Time SAPS StorageTag Commissioning in SCM 0 0.00

Pallets Cases TimePacking/Unpacking in SCM 0 0.00

Pallets Cases TimeLoading/Unloading in SCM 0 0.00

RFID-Integrated Delivery Processing Scenario Print Req Tags Time SAPS StorageTag Commissioning in All 0 0.00

Deliveries Items EPC Time Pieces PalletsPacking/Unpacking in All 0 0.00

Deliveries Items EPC Time Pieces PalletsLoading/Unloading in All with hierarchy 0 0.00

Deliveries Items EPC Time PiecesLoading/Unloading in All without hierarchy 0 0.00

A201
All receives all EPC information for one packed pallet
B201
Enter the number of packed pallets processed per peak time period. Do not divide by 1000.
C201
Enter the number of cases per pallet during this peak time period.
D201
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
A203
Pallets leave/enter the warehouse and goods issue /receipt is registered.
B203
Enter the number of loaded pallets per peak time period. Do not divide by 1000.
C203
Enter the number of cases per pallet during this peak time period.
D203
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
A205
This is the system for creating labels, print records and tags for shipping goods. There are three main functions; tag commissioning, Packing/Unpacking and Loading/Unloading. Each step in RTI prepares some records for BI which are uploaded in batch. This group is for the sizing for the SCM Event handlers. See the white paper for information on sizing the BI workload.
A206
Warehouse worker requests and prints labels for labeling cases. This information is replicated to SCM.
B206
Enter the number of print requests per peak time period for labels. Do not divide by 1000.
C206
Enter the number of RFID labels per print request during this peak time period.
D206
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
A208
All receives all EPC information for one packed pallet. This information is replicated to SCM.
B208
Enter the number of packed pallets processed per peak time period. Do not divide by 1000.
C208
Enter the number of cases per pallet during this peak time period.
D208
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
A210
Pallets leave/enter the warehouse and goods issue /receipt is registered. This information is replicated to SCM.
B210
Enter the number of loaded pallets per peak time period. Do not divide by 1000.
C210
Enter the number of cases per pallet during this peak time period.
D210
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
A212
This is the system for creating labels, print records and tags for shipping goods. There are three main functions; tag commissioning, Packing/Unpacking and Loading/Unloading. Each step in Integrated Delivery prepares some records for BI which are uploaded in batch. This scenario also receives documents from ERP and data is transferred back to ERP using PI. This group is for the sizing for the SCM Event handlers.
A213
Warehouse worker requests and prints labels for labeling cases. This information is replicated to SCM.
B213
Enter the number of print requests per peak time period for labels. Do not divide by 1000.
C213
Enter the number of RFID labels per print request during this peak time period.
D213
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
A215
All receives all EPC information for one packed pallet. This information is replicated to SCM. This sizing is only valid for <= 100 EPC's per delivery.
B215
Enter the number of deliveries processed per peak time period. Do not divide by 100.
C215
Enter the number of line items per delivery during this peak time period.
D215
Enter the number of EPC-Tags per delivery for this peak time period.
E215
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
F215
Enter the number of pieces per line item for this peak time.
G215
Enter the number of pallets per delivery for this peak time period.
A217
Pallets leave/enter the warehouse and goods issue /receipt is registered. This information is replicated to SCM. This sizing is only valid for <= 100 EPC's per delivery.
B217
Enter the number of deliveries processed per peak time period. Do not divide by 100.
C217
Enter the number of line items per delivery during this peak time period.
D217
Enter the number of EPC-Tags per delivery for this peak time period.
E217
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
F217
Enter the number of pieces per line item for this peak time.
G217
Enter the number of pallets per delivery for this peak time period.
A219
Pallets leave/enter the warehouse and goods issue /receipt is registered. This information is replicated to SCM. This sizing is only valid for <= 100 EPC's per delivery.
B219
Enter the number of deliveries processed per peak time period. Do not divide by 100.
C219
Enter the number of line items per delivery during this peak time period.
D219
Enter the number of EPC-Tags per delivery for this peak time period.
E219
Enter the processing time for this peak time period in hours.
F219
Enter the number of pieces per line item for this peak time.
Page 60: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008 INFORMATION ON DOING AN UPGRADE SIZING

DefaultTo what release of SAP are you upgrading? ECC 6.0Will you be adding Unicode? Default is yes. yesHow many additional users will you be adding or specify growth factor(%) 0What is your preferred hardware platform?

Upgrade Sizing information for System i

Upgrade Sizing information for System pWhat AIX level are you running now? 5.2?, 5.3? Other? 5.3If not 5.3, do you plan to upgrade to 5.3 with SMT? yesIf 5.3, are you running the SAP workload in a shared pool? no

Upgrade Sizing information for System xAre you running the SAP workload in a VMware environment? noIs hyperthreading enabled on your current SAP system? no

Upgrade Sizing information for System z

A2
To size your current workload use the Insight tool to capture the 2-3 day period of your peak workload. Download Insight at: http://www-03.ibm.com/support/techdocs/atsmastr.nsf/PubAllNum/PRS381 If SAP is running on System z or System i please read the respective section below. If SAP is running in a shared processor pool on system p read the System p section below. IF SAP is running in a VMware type of shared environment read the System x section below.
A9
a) Select an appropriate timeframe (usually a peak) based on the customer’s workload or business schedule. b) Determine if the SAP system to be measured runs in its own LPAR or shares the LPAR with other non-SAP work. c) If it runs in its own LPAR, request an i5/OS Performance Tool (or other similar tool) report. For Performance Tool request a run during the peak 2-3 day period. Request an interval of 60 seconds. The report will specify the CPU utilization of the assigned processors. This may exceed 100% in cases where the LPAR exceeded its assigned number of processors. The resulting report should be analyzed and the 95th percentile used to calculate the CPU utilization for sizing purposes. d) If it runs in the same LPAR with other work then the customer needs to estimate the amount of the reported CPU utilization that should be attributed to the SAP workload.
A11
a) Select an appropriate timeframe (usually a peak) based on the customer’s workload or business schedule. b) Determine if the SAP system to be measured runs in its own LPAR or shares the LPAR with other non-SAP work. c) If it runs in its own LPAR, request a Nigel’s Monitor (NMON, or other similar tool) report. See techdocs PRS 3754. For NMON, request a run during the peak 2-3 day period. Request an interval of 60 seconds. This would be something like -s 60 -c 4320 The resulting report should be analyzed to calculate the CPU utilization for sizing purposes. d) If it runs in the same LPAR with other work then the customer needs to estimate the amount of the reported CPU utilization that should be attributed to the SAP workload.
A13
Using simultaneous multi threading(SMT) provides about a 30% capacity advantage over previously releases of AIX.
A14
If SAP is running in an LPAR which is part of a pool of LPARs that shares CPU's, then a tool such as NMON is needed to provide an accurate estimate of the current workload.
A16
a) Select an appropriate timeframe (usually a peak) based on the customer’s workload or business schedule. b) Determine if the SAP system to be measured runs in its own virtual machine (VM) or shares the VM with other non-SAP work. c) If it runs in its own VM, request a VMware esxtop (or other similar tool) report. Obtain the VM’s id (VMID) from the ESX server management tool called Virtual Center. For esxtop request a run during the peak 2-3 day period. Request an interval of 60 seconds. The report will specify the CPU utilization of the assigned processors. The esxtop tool runs from the ESX Server command line and you can obtain help by typing 'man esxtop'. The resulting report should be analyzed and the 95th percentile used to calculate the CPU utilization for sizing purposes. d) If it runs in the same VM with other work then the customer needs to estimate the amount of the reported CPU utilization that should be attributed to the SAP workload.
A17
If SAP is running in a virtual machine which is part of a pool of virtual machines that shares CPU's, then a tool such as esxtop is needed to provide an accurate estimate of the current workload.
A20
a) Select an appropriate timeframe (usually a peak) based on the customer’s workload or business schedule. b) Determine if the SAP system to be measured runs in its own LPAR or shares the LPAR with other non-SAP work. c) If it runs in its own LPAR, request a Resource Measurement Facility (RMF) CPU Summary Report and CPU Activity Report for that LPAR in no more than 15 minute intervals (if the timeframe is short, for example only a few hours, then 5 minute intervals may be more appropriate). The Summary Report displays the LPAR’s logical CPU utilization for that interval. To determine the number of logical engines you must look at the CPU Activity Report - Partition Data Report. One of the columns displays the number of logical engines assigned to that LPAR. This data can then be used in a spreadsheet to calculate the required metric..e.g. 90 percentile value. d) If it runs in the same LPAR with other work then the customer must provide a copy of their WLM Service Policy or provide a list of the WLM Service or Report Classes corresponding to the specific work to be measured. You must then request an RMF WLM Report - Goal Mode. For each service or report class to include there will be a field called ‘APPL%’ - this is the measurement for that interval of the work consumed by that service or report class based on a single CPU engine. So, for example, if the value is 123% for a 15 minute interval then the service class used the equivalent of 1.23 engines during that timeframe on average. All of the service or report classes must be summed for that interval in order to determine the utilization of that specific workload. 4b. What is the recommended process for System p? a) Select an appropriate timeframe (usually a peak) based on the customer’s workload or business schedule. b) Determine if the SAP system to be measured runs in its own LPAR or shares the LPAR with other non-SAP work. c) If it runs in its own LPAR, request a Nigel’s Monitor (NMON, or other similar tool) report. For NMON, request a run during the peak 2-3 day period. Request an interval of 60 seconds. This would be something like -s 60 -c 4320 The resulting report should be analyzed and the 95th percentile used to calculate the CPU utilization for sizing purposes. d) If it runs in the same LPAR with other work then the customer needs to estimate the amount of the reported CPU utilization that should be attributed to the SAP workload.
Page 61: SAP Questionnaire 061510

© Copyright IBM Corp. April-2008

INPUTS USER BASED THRUPUT BASEDChanged # of users SAPS Storage Changed ?

ERP NO 0 0 Qser NOCRM NO 0 0 0 NOBW/SEM NO 0 NA NA NOPortal NO 0 NA NA NOPI NA NA NA NA NOTREX NA 0 0 0 NOSM NA 0 NA NA NOSCM APO NA NA NA NA NOSRM NO 0 NA NA NOGTS NA NA NA NA NOBanking NA NA NA NA NOInsurance NA NA NA NA NORetail NA NA NA NA NOUtilities NA NA NA NA NOPLM NA 0 0 0 NOMDM NA 0 0 0 NOMISC NA 0 0 0 NOUpgrade NA NA NA NA NOTotals 0 0 0